JP2020081635A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine suppressing deterioration in game taste.SOLUTION: On the verge of terminating a special symbol variation performance when a low-probability high-base game state and a high-probability high-base game state that are advantageous to a player are terminated and immediately before returning to a normal game state, a display part 50a can execute a result display according to return to the normal game state and, when a relatively-high setting value is set, executes a high setting value performance suggesting that the relatively-high setting value is set, while executing the result display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 121

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball winning a starting opening is established, it is determined whether or not a gaming state advantageous to a player is established. In this determination, the probability of determining that the game state is advantageous to the player cannot be arbitrarily set in the game machine.

JP, 2008-47333, A

However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine, in which it is determined whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to the player, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Determination means for determining whether or not a specific result is obtained,
When the specific result is obtained, game state control means capable of changing to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
Setting means capable of setting a set value for the determination means to perform the determination,
And a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The gaming state control means is capable of ending the advantageous gaming state and setting the normal gaming state when the advantageous gaming state is set,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific information suggesting effect that suggests specific information regarding the set value when the normal game state is set.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of games.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view for explaining a stand-by state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view for explaining a moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view for explaining a rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of indicators. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is the block diagram which shows the electric constitution on the production control baseplate side. (A) is a table showing general figure-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special figure-related determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a universal figure variation pattern determination table, (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table when the set value is "1", (B) is a jackpot determination table when the set value is "2", and (C) is a jackpot determination table when the set value is "3" Is a jackpot determination table when the setting value is "4", (E) is a jackpot determination table when the setting value is "5", and (F) is a setting It is a jackpot determination table when the value is "6". (A) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, (B) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a first look-ahead determination table. It is a second prefetch determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration video, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a setting screen. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a 1st normal background image, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd normal background image, (C) shows an example of a 3rd normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of a probability change background image, (E) is a figure which shows an example of a time saving background image. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot opening production, (B) is a figure which shows an example of a round production, (C) is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot ending production. (A) is a figure showing an example of an effect design, and (B) is a figure showing an example of an effect design display field. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure change production of a loss without reach. It is a figure showing an example from the start of special figure fluctuation production to reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach and is a continuation of FIG. 24. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach and is a continuation of FIG. 25. It is a figure showing an example of a movable body production. It is a figure showing an example of operation production. It is a figure showing an example of a holding effect. It is a figure showing an example of a notice of change of a hold icon. It is a figure showing an example of a notice of change of a hold icon. It is a flow chart of the game control main processing. It is a flow chart of setting value setting processing. It is a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process, and is a figure showing the continuation of FIG. It is a flow chart of normal operation processing. It is a flow chart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is the flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of a 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process, and a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 46. It is a block diagram showing an electric configuration on the game control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a part of a flowchart of a sensor detection process by the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a table which shows the relationship between the set value and the out-ball determination value according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a table which shows the relationship between the setting value and difference number judgment value which concern on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first composite symbol, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second compound symbol, (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third compound symbol, (D) is a first set value The figure which shows an example of a symbol, (E) is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd setting value symbol, (F) is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd setting value symbol. It is a set value pattern pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a set value production by a pachinko game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of a stop symbol pattern decision processing concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a lottery result information determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of a set value effect determination process. It is a flow chart of a stop design pattern decision processing concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a set value effect execution determination table. It is a set pattern production stop symbol pattern determination table. It is a normal stop symbol pattern determination table. It is a normal stop symbol pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine concerning a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure variation effect pattern determination table according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of success/failure reverse effect determination processing. It is a success/failure reverse effect execution determination table. It is a continuation number judgment table. It is a figure showing an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine concerning a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine concerning a 7th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of setting value production processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the setting value effect process, and is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 76. FIG. It is a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a jackpot game control table according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a game state setting table according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the big hit game production by the pachinko game machine concerning an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the big hit game production by the pachinko game machine concerning an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the big hit game production by the pachinko game machine concerning an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a blessing performance determination table. It is a blessing performance determination table. It is a flowchart of a blessing production process. In the ninth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a manner in which variable display of effect symbols is started in a normal start mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the set value production by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart of setting value production judging processing concerning a 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is a second setting value effect determination table. It is a jackpot determination table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a jackpot determination table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a game state setting table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a small hit game control table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of special operation processing concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart of special symbol finalization processing concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a table|surface which shows the jackpot, the small hit, and the loss selectivity which concern on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the game control board which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the setting value setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a setting value determination table. It is a jackpot determination table which concerns on 12th Embodiment of this invention. It is a jackpot determination table which concerns on 12th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a game state setting table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and (B) is a small hit game control table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on 12th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a hit determination table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, (B) is a universal figure variation pattern determination table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and (C) is a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. It is an auxiliary game control table according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing the mode that the specific acquisition number is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the specific acquisition number and the final specific acquisition number are displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that a set value suggestion image is displayed in a normal game state and a set value effect count value indicated by the set value suggestion image is being subtracted. It is a figure showing a mode that a setting value production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a set value production is completed, or a mode that a set value production is continued. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the production|generation control board which concerns on 12th Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing a state where a normal opening effect is being executed, (B) is a diagram showing a state where an even suggestive first setting value effect is being executed, and (C) is an odd number suggesting first setting value effect. It is a figure showing how it is being executed. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on 13th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a mode that a temporary stop display of an effect design showing a loss is performed in the special figure variation effect immediately before returning to the normal game state. It is an explanatory view showing how a second set value effect is executed. It is a 1st setting value production|generation execution determination table which concerns on 13th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a mode that each L reach is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a low set value production is performed in each L reach. It is a figure showing a mode that a high set value production is performed in each L reach. It is an L reach classification determination table which concerns on 14th Embodiment of this invention. It is a setting value production|generation execution determination table which concerns on 14th Embodiment of this invention. It is a set value effect type determination table according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.

<Basic Embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is a premise of a characteristic part of a gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the drawings referred to, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and in principle, duplicate description of the same parts will be omitted. In the following, for simplification of description, a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, or the like is written, and the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, or the like for the symbol or code is omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left, right, up and down directions (in front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, "front" means a direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "rear" means a direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming board unit YU including a gaming board 1 and a gaming machine frame 2 having the gaming board unit YU housed therein. The gaming machine frame 2 is a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to a game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21, to which the game board unit YU is attached, and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. And a door 23.

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer peripheral shape in front view. The inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m in which a large opening having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in the gaming shop, a player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can visually recognize the gaming area 6 formed on the front surface of the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. it can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through the transparent plate 23t.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to shoot a game ball is provided on the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force (firing strength) applied to the game ball to fire the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing strength according to the rotating operation of the handle 72k.

In addition, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 that is arranged immediately below the upper plate 34 are provided on the lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. A first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided in the center of the front side of the upper plate 34. The operation portion visibly protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k is formed in a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing the game balls supplied to the handle 72k is formed. Further, the upper surface of the lower plate 35 is provided with a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Further, on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 protruding forward are provided. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side face downward and are predetermined in the left-right direction. They are lined up side by side. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed down is provided below the right decorative body 32. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is formed in a rod shape. Further, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34, and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

The positions and the numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is composed of a transparent synthetic resin plate. An opening 1A having a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front is formed substantially at the center of the game board 1.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed so as to project forward along the opening 1A. Further, outside the center decoration body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 that is substantially parallel to the center decoration 61.

Then, on the front surface of the game board 1, a region surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like forms a game region 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration 61, the outer rails 62, and the inner rails 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launch area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass to head toward the game area 6.

The game area 6 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In the game area 6, a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided in a protruding manner. As for the game nail, the game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 are suitable for the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the special winning opening 14, and the like. Constitutes a route to guide to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can enter. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game balls that have entered the general winning opening 10 are discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as they are.

Further, a first start winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center ornament 61 in the game area 6. The first starting prize 11 is formed in the first starting winning device 11D so that game balls can be entered. The first starting prize winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting opening 11 is constant (invariant) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 11, a predetermined number (eg, 4) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The game ball that has entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

In addition, a warp portion 61w through which the game ball is passed is formed from the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. The entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center ornament 61. The game ball that has entered the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61 near the exit of the warp portion 61w. At the tip of the stage 61s, a lower guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided. The first starting port 11 is provided immediately below the lower guiding portion 61y.

A second start winning device (so-called “Den Chu”) 12D is provided immediately below the first starting opening 11 in the game area 6. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting opening 12 that can be changed between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the electric Chu opening/closing member 12k included in the electric Chu 12D. That is, the second starting opening 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric tube opening/closing member 12k.

The power switch opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member in front view, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k projects forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k projects vertically to the game area 6, and the second starting opening 12 opens so that the ball can enter. Specifically, the vertical portion, which is erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric Chu opening/closing member 12k, receives the game ball and is guided to the second starting opening 12 from the horizontal portion.

Thus, only when the electric-chu opening/closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 12. When the game balls enter the second starting opening 12, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game balls that have entered the second starting port 12 are discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as they are.

Further, the gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center ornament 61. The gate 13 is configured so that a game ball can pass therethrough. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. The game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first start winning device 11D in the game area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The special winning device 14D is formed with a special winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The special winning opening 14 is closed or opened by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the special winning device 14D. That is, the special winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member formed of a flat plate having a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and normally closes the special winning opening 14. A horizontal rotation shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated about its rotation axis by about 90 degrees so that the upper end thereof is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k is in a state of vertically projecting into the game area 6, and the special winning opening 14 is opened so that the player can enter the ball.

In this way, only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special winning opening 14. When the game balls enter the special winning opening 14, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game balls that have entered the special winning opening 14 are directly discharged to the outside of the game area 6.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the game area 6, its upper surface is formed obliquely downward left, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting opening 12 is provided in the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to project forward from. The game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the first start opening 11, the second start opening 12, the large winning opening 14, and the general winning opening 10, the entry of the game ball and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively described. The second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13 are collectively referred to as “winning”.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game balls can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side and a right game area 6B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hitting".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by left-handing is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by right-handing. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also configured by a large number of gaming nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim the winning at the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by left-handing. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a special winning opening 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim for winning at the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the special winning opening 14 by shooting a game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by right-handing.

It should be noted that approximately the bottom of the game area 6 is provided with two outlets 19 for discharging the game balls that have been hit in the game area 6 but have not won any of the prize openings to the outside of the game area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls to be won in each prize hole can be appropriately set.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board effect unit EU is a unit of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board movable device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k includes a horizontally long, plate-shaped lifting member 55k2 that is held in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotation member 55k1 that is provided at the center of the lifting member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state in which the board movable body 55k is arranged at the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is slightly lower than the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged such that only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player and most of the lower part is invisible in the standby state (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the movable board 55k as a whole can descend from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, rise from the operating position and return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operation position is a position where the movable board 55k is located substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be appropriately set, and whether the board movable body 55k is located above or below the substantial center of the opening 1A in a front view. Good.

Further, the rotary member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view about a rotary shaft formed in the front-rear direction at the center thereof (see FIG. 3C). The rotary motion of the rotary member 55k1 can be executed when the movable board 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, is held in the operating position, and moves from the operating position to the standby position.

The positions and the number of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

Next, the display devices 8 arranged on the right side (portion other than the game area 6) of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 in the vertical center will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 has a special figure 1 display 81a that variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter, "special figure 1") and a second special symbol (hereinafter, "special figure 2"). The special figure 2 display 81b for variably displaying "," and a general figure display 82 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol (hereinafter referred to as "general drawing") are included. Further, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 hold indicator 83a which displays a special figure 1 hold number described later and a special figure 2 hold indicator 83b which displays a special figure 2 hold number described later. ..

The variable display of special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 11. The variable display of the special map 2 is executed when the special map 2 lottery is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 12. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special maps 1 and 2 are collectively referred to as “special maps”, and the special map 1 lottery and the special maps 2 lottery are collectively referred to as “special map lottery”. Further, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure display 81". Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

The variable display of the special map informs the result of the special drawing. In the variable display of special maps, stop display is performed after the special maps are variably displayed. The special figure stopped and displayed (stop special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the special display stopped and displayed is a predetermined specific special drawing, a jackpot game accompanied by opening of the special winning opening 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting modes of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represent the special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the final 1, 2, 5, and 6 from the left, such as "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: unlit) An LED turns on. This lighting mode is a jackpot design and represents a jackpot. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is lost, only the rightmost LED is finally turned on as in "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a loss design and represents the loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set appropriately. Therefore, for example, all LEDs may be turned off as a lost design.

Further, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable figure is displayed for a predetermined variation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode of the special figure is a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right, for example. Note that the mode of variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink at once unless the LEDs are stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately even if the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. Specifically, it is a case where there is a winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12 of the game ball during execution of the variable display of the special figure or execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning. This suspended special drawing lottery and variable display of special maps are called "special map reservation".

To hold the special map, the special map 1 lottery held on the basis of the winning of the first starting opening 11 and the "special drawing 1 hold" representing the variable display of the special drawing 1 and the winning of the second starting opening 12 There is a special figure 2 lottery held on the basis of the special figure 2 and "special figure 2 hold" representing a variable display of the special figure 2. Then, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a displays the number of special figure 1 hold, that is, the number of held special figure 1 lottery and variable display of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b displays the number of special figure 2 hold, that is, the number of pending special figure 2 lottery and the variable display of special figure 2.

It is possible to set the upper limit value for the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to provide them. Further, when an upper limit is set for the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations may be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit values of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations are set to “4”.

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs. By turning on the LEDs by the number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold, The number of the reservations of FIG. 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. In the following, the number of special figure 1 reservations will be referred to as "special figure 1 reservation number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 reservations will be referred to as "special figure 2 reservation number (U2)". Further, the “special map 1 reserved number” and the “special map 2 reserved number” are collectively referred to as the “special map reserved number”. Furthermore, the "special map 1 reserved display 83a" and the "special map 2 reserved display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special map reserved display 83".

In addition, the variable display of the general figure is executed when the general figure lottery is carried out in response to the winning of the game ball to the gate 13. Then, the variable display of the universal figure notifies the result of the universal figure lottery. In the variable display of the public figure, the general figure is displayed in a variable state and then stopped. The stop-displayed universal map (stopped universal map) is identification information representing the result of the universal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the public display stopped and displayed is a predetermined specific public graphic, an auxiliary game involving opening of the second starting opening 12 is performed.

The figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the public figure display device 82 represents the general figure corresponding to the result of the general figure lottery, that is, the result of the general figure lottery. When the result of the universal drawing is a win, both LEDs are finally turned on, such as “□□” (□: lit, ■: unlit). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents the winning symbol. Further, when the result of the universal drawing lottery is lost, only the right LED is finally turned on as in the case of “■□”. This lighting mode is a loss design and represents the loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the universal drawing is not limited, and can be set appropriately. For example, a mode in which all LEDs are turned off may be adopted as the lost design.

Further, before the general figure is stopped and displayed, the general figure is variably displayed for a predetermined variation time. In the basic embodiment, the variable display mode of the general figure is a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on. Note that the mode of variable display of the general figure is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs flash at the same time unless the LEDs are stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode). ..

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, depending on the progress of the game by the game control board 100 and the game control board 100 for performing control (progress of the game) related to the game in which the game profit can be obtained. Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls the image, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of the game balls, and each board 100, 120, 140, 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190. The power switch is turned on/off by an ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191.

In the vicinity of the game control board 100, a set value cylinder 70 for changing a set value, which will be described later, and a set value switch 71 are provided. The setting value cylinder 70 is provided with an insertion hole 70A into which a dedicated setting key is inserted. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the insertion hole 70A, the setting value cylinder 70 can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the reference standby state. Then, as will be described later, by rotating the set value cylinder 70 clockwise from the standby state by 90 degrees, the operation of the set value switch 71 becomes effective. The set value switch 71 is configured to be able to be pressed. Further, on the surface of the game control board 100, a set value display 87 that displays the current set value is mounted. The set value display 87 is a red 7-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 6, on the game control board 100, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls a game. In addition, the game which can obtain the game profit to be controlled by the game control board 100 includes a special figure lottery, a special figure variable display, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general figure lottery, and a common figure variable display. , Auxiliary games, etc. are included.

The game control microcomputer 101 has a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game. A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. In the game ROM 103, a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, an auxiliary, which will be described later. A game control table and the like are stored. The game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

The game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, if there is a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12 of the game ball, the special figure reservation can occur, but if the special figure reservation is possible, that is, the special figure reservation number is When the upper limit value is not reached, determination information including various random numbers for performing special drawing lottery is acquired based on this winning. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information obtained by winning the game ball in the first starting opening 11 is referred to as "special map 1-related determination information", and is obtained by winning the game ball in the second starting opening 12. The determination information associated with the determination information is referred to as “special figure 2 related determination information”. Further, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit 105a in the special figure holding storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 holding. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored as the special figure 2 hold in the special figure 2 hold storage section 105b in the special figure hold storage section 105. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 holdings is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 holding storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 holdings is set to "4".

Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a set value storage unit 107 that stores set value data indicating a set value described later.

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Further, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various types of sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a special winning opening sensor 14a. ..

The general winning opening sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won the general winning opening 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The special winning opening sensor 14a detects a game ball that has won the special winning opening 14.

Further, various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a set value cylinder sensor 70a and a set value switch sensor 71a.

Further, the set value cylinder sensor 70a can detect a rotational operation of the set value cylinder 70. When the set value cylinder 70 is rotated, the set value cylinder sensor 70a detects the set value cylinder 70, and outputs a detection signal indicating that the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated. Output to 100.

On the other hand, the set value switch sensor 71a can detect the pressing operation of the set value switch 71. When the set value switch 71 is pressed, the set value switch sensor 71a detects the press operation of the set value switch 71 and outputs a detection signal indicating that the set value switch 71 has been pressed. Output to 100.

In addition, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric tuner solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric Chu solenoid 12s drives the electric Chu opening/closing member 12k of the electric Chu 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the special winning device 14D.

The type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

Further, to the game control board 100, the display devices 8 (special figure display 81, general figure display 82, and special figure hold display 83), and set value display 87 are connected. Display control of these display devices 8 and the set value display device 87 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 is connected to the card unit CU and the payout device 73, and is also connected to the launch device 72. Further, the card unit CU is a device which is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enables the ball lending based on the information of the inserted prepaid card or the like.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 101 or a signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out prize balls or lent balls. The payout balls and the rented balls are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting the prize balls and the rental balls.

The launch device 72 is a device that launches a game ball. The handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for causing the launching device 72 to launch a game ball, and is included in the launching device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects contact of the player with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the firing control circuit 175.

Further, the handle 72k is connected to a knob 72b of a firing volume capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the knob 72b of the launching volume. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, one game ball is shot about every 0.6 seconds when the rotation operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information about the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. Based on various commands sent from the game control board 100, the effect control board 120 can grasp the progress status of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100.

In addition, the connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as communication direction regulating means is interposed.

As shown in FIG. 7, on the effect control board 120, a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted. The effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control unit that controls the effect together with the image control board 140, the sound control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the production control unit includes at least the production control board 120, and uses the production device (the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the movable board 55k, etc.) for game production, customer waiting production, and operation promotion. It is only necessary to be able to control the production.

It should be noted that the productions to be controlled by the production control board 120 include game productions (special figure variation production, hold production, jackpot game production, etc.), customer waiting production, operation of the first production button 40k and the second production button 41k. An operation promotion effect for urging an operation in an effective period (operation effective period) is included.

The effect control microcomputer 121 is stored in the effect ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling effect along with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, the effect RAM 124 used as a work memory, and the effect ROM 123. The production CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores programs for performing effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, and 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The effect ROM 123 may be externally attached.

In the effect RAM 124, a starting winning command holding storage unit 125 that stores a starting winning command described later, a symbol designating command storage unit 126 that stores a designing designing command that will be described later, and a special symbol variation that stores a special symbol variation start command that will be described later. A start command storage unit 127 and a set value flag storage unit 128 that stores a set value flag described later are provided.

An image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. To perform. It should be noted that the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 can be connected to each other by transmitting a signal from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and a signal from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. It is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . In addition, the image control board 140 is a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video) that is used for expanding image data stored in the CGROM 145. A Random Access Memory (146) and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 are provided. All or part of these electronic components may be configured with one chip.

In the CGROM 145, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50 (still image data or moving image data, specifically, characters, items, patterns, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (Including a pattern) and image data such as a background image) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads the image data from the CGROM 145 and expands it in the expansion area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the instruction from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the developed image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list is composed of a command group for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the image transmittance.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121, based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100, through the voice control circuit 161, from the speaker 52 voice, music, and. Output sound effects.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. The voice control circuit 161 may be configured by a board and a CPU may be mounted. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the voice data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, to the effect control board 120, various sensors as an input unit and various actuators as a drive source are connected via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. The production control board 120 also outputs signals to various actuators.

The various switches connected to the production control board 120 include a first production button sensor 40a and a second production button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k has been pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. Upon detecting that each of the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a has been operated, it outputs a signal according to the detected content to the effect control board 120.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

The various actuators connected to the performance control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and an elevating member motor 55m2. The rotary member motor 55m1 can drive the rotary member 55k1 to rotate the rotary member 55k1. The lifting member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the lifting member 55k2. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. ..

Note that, hereinafter, the operation of the “rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2” may be collectively referred to as the “operation of the movable board 55k”. Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 is also referred to as "rotating the movable body 55k or lowering or raising it".

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. In detail, the production control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting/extinguishment or emission color, lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and according to the light emission pattern data of the frame lamp 53. Control the light emission. In addition, the data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

It should be noted that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured by a board to mount the CPU. In this case, the CPU may be caused to execute lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like and operation control of the movable board 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

3. Main Game Played by Gaming Machine Next, a main game played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16.

3-1. Games related to public figures First, the games related to public figures are explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the universal figure lottery when the launched game ball passes through the gate 13. When the general figure lottery is performed, the general figure display 82 displays the general figure in a variable manner (variable display and then stop display). Here, the universal display stopped and displayed includes a winning design and a lost design. It should be noted that the lost design of the universal drawing is also referred to as a “missed universal design” in order to distinguish it from the lost design of the special drawing described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game relating to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the loss general map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game relating to the passage of the gate 13 is finished. Further, in the following, the gaming ball passing through the gate 13 when the variable display of the universal figure or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "establishment of the universal figure variable start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a series of games such as a general figure lottery, a general figure variable display, and an auxiliary game by acquiring the general figure variation start condition and acquiring the general figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(A), there is a normal symbol random number in the acquired universal figure related determination information. The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit judgment. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Winning determination Winning determination is a determination for determining whether or not to hit (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9A, for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit judgment table, the judgment value of the normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number judgment value) is appropriately distributed to the hit and the loss as the result of the hit judgment. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether the hit is a hit or a hit. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the ordinary figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is loss, the loss general map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the general map. The winning probability per winning can be changed appropriately.

3-1-2. General figure variation pattern determination/general figure variable display The universal figure variation pattern determination is a determination for determining a universal figure variation pattern using a universal figure variation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B, for example. The universal figure fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined items regarding variable display of the universal figure such as the universal figure variation time.

The universal figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the universal figure fluctuation pattern determination table includes a universal pattern variation pattern determination table (non-time saving general pattern variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state. There is a universal figure variation pattern determination table (time saving universal figure variation pattern determination table) used in the state.

In each public figure fluctuation pattern determination table, one public figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the public figure fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each public figure that is stopped. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can change the normal figure variation time between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in the non-time saving state, for the variable display of the public figure when stopping and displaying the general figure of the loss (missing general figure), the universal figure variation pattern that the universal figure variation time is 30 seconds is determined, and the winning symbol is determined. For the variable display of the universal figure when the stationary display is performed, the universal figure variation pattern in which the universal figure variation time is 30 seconds is determined. Also, in the time saving state, the variable display of the universal figure when the lost universal figure is stopped and displayed is determined to be the universal figure variation pattern that the universal figure variation time is 5 seconds, and the universal figure when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed For the variable display of, the universal figure variation pattern is determined so that the universal figure variation time is 5 seconds. It should be noted that these universal figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the public figure display 82 variably displays the general figure of the general figure fluctuation time associated with the general figure fluctuation pattern determined by the general figure fluctuation pattern determination. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the universal figure fluctuation pattern determination, the universal figure display 82 variably displays the universal figure.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game The auxiliary game is a variable display of the public figure, and is executed when the winning symbol is stopped (displayed) as the display result (the result of the general figure lottery). In the auxiliary game, Den Chu 12D is opened

The elements that make up the auxiliary game (auxiliary game elements) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, it is possible to associate a game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can change the opening time of the electric chew 12D between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the electric chu 12D is opened for the first opening time in which it is difficult to win a game ball of 0.2 seconds or the like into the electric chu 12D. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, the game ball is won in the electric chew 12D for a time longer than the first opening time such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closing) of 1.0 second. The power tube 12D is opened for a second opening time that is easy to operate.

In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as “short open auxiliary game”. On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also called "long open auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game, and for example, it is opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again with an interval of once closing. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Game relating to special figure Next, a game relating to special figure will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special map 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first starting opening 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 indicator 81a displays the variable of the special figure 1 (variable display and then stop display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, in the special figure 1 which is stopped and displayed, there are a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special drawing 1 lottery includes a big hit and a loss.

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second starting opening 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is carried out, the special figure 2 display 81b variably displays the special figure 2 (stop display after performing variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, in the special figure 2 which is stopped and displayed, there are a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. In other words, the special drawing 2 lottery result has a big hit and a loss.

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning is finished.

In the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting opening 12 is "establishment of the second starting condition". That. Further, "establishment of the first start condition" and "establishment of the second start condition" are collectively referred to as "establishment of the start condition". In addition, regarding the lost design of the special design, it is also referred to as a “missed special design” in order to distinguish it from the lost design of the above-mentioned general design.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as a special drawing lottery, a variable display of special drawings, and a jackpot game when the starting condition is satisfied and the special drawing related determination information is acquired. Then, in order to variably display the special figure, various judgments are made on the special figure-related judgment information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure-related determination information to be acquired includes special symbol random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for making a jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for making a jackpot symbol type determination. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for making a reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a variation pattern determination of a special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Big hit determination The big hit determination is to use a big hit determination table to determine whether or not it is a big hit (whether or not to carry out a big hit game), in other words, either a big hit or a loss. The jackpot determination table can be provided for each set value as shown in, for example, FIGS. 10(A) to 10(F). That is, the jackpot determination table can be associated with the set value.

The set value is a value such as a parameter associated with the probability that the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as “jackpot probability”). As will be described later, the set value can be set when the power of the game control board 100 is turned on. By operating the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 described above, the set value can be set for each pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In the basic embodiment, six types of setting values 1 to 6 are set. Specifically, in the jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination table used when the setting value is "1", the jackpot determination table used when the setting value is "2", and the setting value of "3" When the setting value is "4", when the setting value is "4", when the setting value is "4", when the setting value is "5" There is a jackpot determination table used.

Further, in each of the jackpot determination tables associated with the set value, a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter, referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. (Hereinafter, referred to as “high probability jackpot determination table”). The type of set value is not limited to the basic embodiment, and can be set appropriately.

In each jackpot determination table associated with the setting value and the gaming state, the jackpot, which is the result of the jackpot determination, and the loss are assigned special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values). The pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the obtained special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the gaming state, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A) to FIG. 10(F), for each set value, the high-probability jackpot determination table is a special symbol random number determination value that is determined as a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table Is set a lot. Furthermore, for the same gaming state, as the set value becomes higher, the number of special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a big hit is set. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to be determined as a big hit.

In addition, it is possible to appropriately change how to allocate the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot, determine the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 11A, for example. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot pattern with the contents of the jackpot, in other words, the jackpot constituent elements (contents advantageous to the player), which are constituted by the gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is the type of the special symbol that is variably displayed (special diagram 1/special diagram 2), in other words, the jackpot symbol type determination is caused (the jackpot symbol type determination is generated). It is associated with the type of the opened starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the jackpot used when performing the variable display of the toku figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot designs can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol random number determination value (jackpot symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired jackpot symbol random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, jackpot symbol random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The jackpot pattern of Toku-zu 1 and the type of jackpot design of Toku-zu 2 can be set as appropriate, for example, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, the jackpot symbol of Toku-zu 1 As three jackpot designs of jackpot design A, jackpot design B, and jackpot design C, as jackpot designs of special figure 2, jackpot design D, jackpot design E, and jackpot design F of three types Can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11(A), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, jackpot symbol random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. There is. The distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol types can be changed as appropriate. Further, the types of jackpot symbols can be appropriately increased or decreased.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment Reach judgment is, for example, when the result of the big hit judgment is a failure, using a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. 11(B), whether or not the reach is generated in the special figure variation effect described later. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). In the case of being associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach. Judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is assigned to the reach determination result “reach (reach is generated)” and “reach not (reach is not generated)”. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (reach is generated).

As shown in FIG. 11B, the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as “reach is present (reach is generated)” may be different between the non-time saving reach determination table and the time saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of the reach determination performed on the premise that the jackpot determination result is “miss”, “reach is present (reach is generated)” is called “reach with loss”, and “no reach ( "No reach is generated") is sometimes referred to as "miss without reach".

3-2-4. Special figure variation pattern determination Special figure variation pattern determination is a variation pattern determination table (special figure variation pattern) of a special symbol as shown in, for example, FIG. 12 to FIG. 13 regardless of whether the result of the big hit determination is a big hit or a loss. (Determination table) is used to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern of special figure) of variable display of special figure.

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items regarding a special figure variation time, a so-called “measure”, and a production flow (production content) of a special figure variation production described later. In addition, the special figure variation pattern includes identification information regarding the result of the big hit determination, the result of the big hit symbol type determination, and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the effect flow (effect content) of the special figure change time and the special figure change effect. It is also possible to make it. It should be noted that the type and number of special figure variation patterns can be appropriately changed.

The special figure variation pattern determination table is the type of the special symbol to be variably displayed as the determination target (special figure 1/special figure 2), in other words, the starting mouth of the winning combination caused by the special figure variation pattern determination. It is possible to associate it with the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern determination table includes the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used when performing.

Then, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 used in the time saving state. There is a variation pattern determination table (special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table for time saving). On the other hand, similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is also used in the non-time saving state and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table).

Further, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with a jackpot determination result and a reach determination result. That is, the non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include a jackpot symbol, a reachable loss, and a reachless loss. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving also have jackpot symbols, reach loss, and no reach loss.

Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss, which is associated with the gaming state, can be associated with the special figure 1 pending number. For example, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach-free loss used when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 0 to 2, and is used when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss, which is associated with the gaming state, can also be associated with the special figure 2 reserved number. Specifically, when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 0 to 2, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for reach-less loss, and when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 3 to 4 And the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for loss without reach used for.

Then, the special figure display unit 81 displays the change of the special figure of the special figure change time according to the special figure change pattern determined by each special figure change pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special map, as the display result of the special map variable display (the result of the special symbol lottery), when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the next special symbol is not immediately performed, and subsequently. The jackpot game is executed.

Further, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the effect flow of the special figure variation effect as shown in the third column from the right of the tables of FIGS. 12 to 13. Here, a description will be given of typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure change effect associated with the special figure change pattern.

As effects that compose the effect flow of the special figure variation effect, there are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle effect.

Normal fluctuation suggests that the effect symbol that was stopped and displayed starts to fluctuate, and that each of the effect symbols is displayed at a high speed so that it is difficult to recognize and variable display of special symbols is started. It is a production to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation effect related to the loss change without reach (the part from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop of the effect symbol), and the part in the special figure fluctuation effect that the reach occurs until the reach is established (confirmed) is a normal fluctuation. It may consist of

Immediately after the reach is established (confirmed) through the normal fluctuation, the N reach is, for example, the remaining one in a state in which the effect symbol forming the reach is temporarily stopped at that position for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It is an effect in which the effect symbol slows down and fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The jackpot expectations that N-reach suggests are higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L-reach and SP-reach as described below. When the special figure fluctuation production ends with N reach, the remaining one production design which changes at the low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one effect design stops at an effect design different from the effect design forming the reach. If the special figure variation effect does not end in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes again at high speed, and the reach is maintained and the L reach or L reach is developed (switched).

The L reach is an effect that can be executed after the N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than the N reach, suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect pattern forming the reach is reduced, and at a predetermined position where the background image is not hindered compared to the case of the N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display unit 50a, with the right effect design EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), the background image dedicated to L reach is switched (a video dedicated to L reach flows). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the content of the L-reach effect, an image of a scene different from the game related to the SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the hero character performing special training to learn a special move.

SP reach is an effect that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed longer than L reach and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect pattern that constitutes the reach is reduced, and a predetermined position that does not hinder the background image as compared with the case of the N reach (for example, a left effect pattern EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display unit 50a, in the state where the right effect design EZ3 has moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), the background image dedicated to SP reach is switched (a video dedicated to SP reach flows). In the SP reach, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the content of the production of SP reach, an image of a scene in which the team to which the hero character belongs and the team to which the rival of the hero character belongs, is displayed.

The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after the reach in a time saving state, and is an effect that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. In the battle production as well, the established reach is maintained, but the production symbols constituting the reach are reduced and at a predetermined position (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is the display unit 50a. (Upper right of), switch to the background image dedicated to the battle effect (the image dedicated to the battle effect is played). In the battle effect, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the battle effect, the effect symbols forming the reach in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle effect are displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition to the state in which the reach is visible, for example, a state in which the effect design forming the reach is difficult or invisible from the display unit 50a for a predetermined period in relation to the dedicated background image is included. Further, the effect contents of the normal variation, the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle effect can be appropriately changed. Furthermore, the effects that form the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the tables of FIGS. 12 to 13, it is possible to give a name to the special figure variation pattern in association with the jackpot determination result, the effect content of the special figure variation effect, and the like. .. The special figure variation pattern related to the big hit may be collectively referred to as "big hit variation", and the special figure variation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "miss variation".

Furthermore, the special map variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot determination result is “SP reach variation”, the special map variation pattern in which L reach is performed is “L reach variation”, and the special figure variation is in N reach. The special figure variation pattern where the effect ends may be collectively referred to as “N reach variation”. Further, the loss variation with reach is referred to as “loss variation with reach”, and the loss variation without reach is sometimes collectively referred to as “normal loss variation”.

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform the pre-reading determination based on the acquired special map-related determination information, for example, using a pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 before performing the jackpot determination. is there. The look-ahead determination table is the type of the starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special drawing variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). It is possible to relate to 2). That is, in the pre-reading determination table, the first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 14) when the first starting port 11 is won and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is performed, and the second starting port 12 is won, The second prefetch determination table (FIG. 15) when the variable display of 2 is performed. The pre-reading determination based on the first pre-reading determination table is also referred to as "first pre-reading determination", and the pre-reading determination based on the second pre-reading determination table is also referred to as "second pre-reading determination".

Further, the look-ahead determination table can be associated with a game state (a normal game state/a high probability high base game state/a low probability high base game state) described later. That is, the pre-reading determination table, the pre-reading determination table used in the normal game state (pre-reading determination table for normal gaming state), and the pre-reading determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state (high probability high base game There is a state pre-reading determination table) and a pre-reading determination table (low-probability high base gaming state pre-reading determination table) used in the low probability high base gaming state.

That is, the prefetch determination table, the first prefetch determination table used in the normal gaming state, the first prefetch determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and the low probability high base gaming state A first look-ahead determination table used, a second look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second look-ahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a low probability high base gaming state And a second look-ahead determination table used for.

The pre-reading determination patterns using the pre-reading determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 specify the special-drawing variation pattern relating to the variable display of the special drawing performed by winning the winning opening 11 or 12. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure variation pattern relating to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure variation pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the prefetch determination result. If "big hit" is specified in the prefetch determination, the big hit symbol type is also specified as the prefetch determination result. In addition, when using the pre-reading determination table to specify the success or failure of the big hit, the special symbol random number determination value corresponding to the set value that is set is used.

Then, the look-ahead determination result including information about the special figure variation pattern is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a pre-reading determination result along with its generation. Note that what information is specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate.

As described above, by performing the big hit determination, the big hit symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure display 81 variably displays the special figure. Then, in the variable display of special symbols, as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery), when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the next special symbol is not performed, and subsequently the big hit game is executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game

The jackpot game is a plurality of round games involving opening and closing of the special winning opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and the final round game. The ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the game until the jackpot game ends. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP or ED. Further, hereinafter, the predetermined number of times (predetermined order) of the round game is simply referred to as "round". For example, the first (first) round game is also referred to as "1 round (1R)", and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 round (10R)".

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, the jackpot game can be associated with the jackpot symbol type. And, one or a plurality of types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table, the elements that make up the jackpot game (jackpot game components) are stored. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the special winning opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type of the special winning opening to be opened and the opening time (opening pattern), and the time to close until the next opening. (Closing time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), etc. are included.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 16(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game component for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 16(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 16(A) will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter, also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern C (hereinafter, also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Further, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot pattern D (hereinafter, also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as the "fifth jackpot game"), the round game is played 6 times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as “six jackpot game”), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth jackpot game.

In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls determined in advance is detected by the special winning opening sensor 14a, even if the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 14 has not passed, The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 16, which kind of jackpot game is executed is determined by the kind of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. May be. For example, the game area 6 is provided with a device capable of being distributed to two winning openings, and when one of the winning openings is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed, while when the other winning opening is won, a predetermined winning opening is given. One of the jackpot game consisting of more than a number of round games and the jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, a game state in which the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot game state includes a normal game state which is a basic base game state and a specific game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The factors that are “advantageous to the player” related to the specific game state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting opening 12. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting opening 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

The advantage of the jackpot probability to the player is that the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot is easy to win. Further, regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12 for the player, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal game state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. It means that the time will be long.

Then, as the specific game state, both the jackpot probability and the opening time of the second starting opening 12 per unit time are advantageous to the player, and the second is advantageous only to the jackpot probability to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific game state and a third specific game state in which only the opening time of the second starting opening 12 per unit time is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that it is possible to mount a part of the three specific game states without mounting all of these three specific game states on the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state, and a state that is advantageous to the player with respect to the jackpot probability is called a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is a normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called a “normal probability state”.

Also, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state, A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time saving state". On the other hand, the state in which the opening time of the second starting opening 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal game state and the ease of opening the second starting opening 12 is not advantageous to the player is "non-time saving". State".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described in detail. As described above, the time saving state has a longer opening time of the power tube 12D per unit time than the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which the second starting opening 12 is more likely to win the prize than the non-time saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win the second starting opening 12 in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state will be described.

For example, by setting the time saving state to be a state in which the universal figure variation time is likely to be shorter than the non-time saving state, it is possible to make the second starting opening 12 easier to win in the time saving state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time-saving state, the figure-changing time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the figure-changing time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time-saving state is used. Let it be decided. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of executions of the universal figure lottery per unit time increases. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning the hit in the hit determination is the same as the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game, the figure drawing lot per unit time The larger the number of executions, the longer the opening time of the power tube 12D per unit time.

In addition, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than that in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make the second starting opening 12 easier to win in the time saving state. .. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric Chu 12D is opened for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric Chu 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Try to open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning the hit in the hit determination and the universal figure variation time are the same, the number of times of executing the auxiliary game per unit time becomes equal, so once. The longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game, the longer the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time.

Further, by setting the time saving state to be a state in which it is more likely to be hit in the hit determination as compared to the non-time saving state, it is possible to easily make the second start opening 12 win in the time saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the hit determination has a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time saving state, the hit determination has a probability of 59936/65536. .. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure fluctuation time in one auxiliary game are the same, there is a high probability that the hit determination is successful. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the power tube 12D per unit time increases.

In this way, in the time saving state, it is easier to win the winning than in the non-time saving state, the general figure fluctuation time is likely to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. By satisfying the three conditions, in the time saving state, the opening time of the power tube 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time saving state, and it is possible to facilitate the winning in the second starting opening 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, increases. Therefore, in the high time saving state of the base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed as compared with the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the non-time saving state.

In the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time may not be set, but only some conditions may be set. Finally, in the time saving state, the opening time of the power tube 12D per unit time is longer than that in the non-time saving state, and it is only necessary that the winning in the second starting opening 12 is facilitated.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of executions of variable display of special maps per unit time is reduced, or the special map variation pattern with shorter special map variation time is selected more easily than in the non-time saving state. The average of the figure fluctuation time may be set low. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace at which the special figure reservation is exhausted is increased, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting opening is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, the first specific game state is referred to as “high probability high base game state” and the second specific game state is referred to as “high probability low” in association with the content of the advantage to the player for each specific game state. The "base game state" and the third specific game state are also referred to as "low probability high base game state". Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as "low probability low base gaming state".

Therefore, the low-probability low-base game state can be said to be a game state controlled in the normal probability state and the non-time saving state. Similarly, the low-probability high-base gaming state is controlled by the normal-probability state and the short-term state, the high-probability low-base gaming state is controlled by the high-probability state and the non-short-term state, and the high-probability high-base gaming state is controlled by the high-probability state and the short-term state. It can be said that there is a game state.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in a low-probability low base gaming state, a low-probability high base gaming state, a high-probability low base gaming state, a high-probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a long time, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, the big hit game state can be said to be a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be referred to as "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Note that the high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal-probability state. is there. In addition, the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the ease of winning the prize at the second starting opening 12 is higher than the non-time saving state. It is in a game state. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot winning state 14 in which the number of prize balls by one winning is larger than that of the first starting opening 11 and the second starting opening 12 is opened, so that the jackpot gaming state is a low probability low base game. The game state is more advantageous to the player than the state.

Moreover, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the normal gaming state is first set. The jackpot gaming state is set by performing a stop display of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by winning the big hit and executing the big hit game. Next, setting of the specific game state will be described.

3-5. Specific game state setting The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific game state with the end of the big hit game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled/progressed in a specific game state. The duration of this specific game state can be set appropriately. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit. Further, it is possible to limit the period during which the specific game state can be continued.

When the duration of the specific game state is limited, the specific game state can be terminated when the ending condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific game state ends, the normal game state can be set. Further, for the high probability high base gaming state, when the ending condition is satisfied, the low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state can be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may be continued until the next big hit. Further, the same or different ending condition may be set for the newly set low probability high base game state or high probability low base game state, and the normal game state may be set when the ending condition is satisfied.

Further, the ending condition for the continuation period of the specific game state can be set appropriately. As the ending condition, for example, the number of executions of variable display of special figure can be set. Further, the number of executions of the special map variable display is not limited, and the elapsed time after the big hit game, the number of shot balls of the game ball after the big hit game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the big hit game, or whether to end the specific game state It is possible to set the derivation of the result of ending in the lottery of whether or not (so-called “falling lottery”) as the end condition. Furthermore, these elements may be individually set as the end condition or may be set as a composite.

Note that these end conditions may be set the same for all the specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, or set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You may. Further, the ending condition may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the ending condition, and the content of the ending condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 16(B), the jackpot pattern A, the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol D, or the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol E is high after completion of the game. The game may be controlled in the high probability base game state. Here, for this high-probability-high base game state, it is possible to continue until the big hit is won, without providing an end condition. Further, the jackpot symbol C, and the game may be controlled in a low-probability-high base gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol F is completed. Here, an end condition can be set for this low-probability-high base game state, and the special condition variable display can be set 100 times as the end condition. In this way, when the number of executions of variable display of special figure is set as the ending condition, the number of times is also referred to as “specified number of times”.

Furthermore, the specified number of times can be set separately for each of the high probability state and the time saving state that form the specific game state. In this case, the specified number of times for the high-probability state is referred to as a “high-probability specified number of times”, and the specified number of times for a time-shortened state is referred to as a “time-shortened specified number of times”.

The relationship between such a jackpot type symbol, a specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an ending condition, and the content of the ending condition is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

In addition, paying attention to the game profit of the jackpot, the jackpot in which the game progresses in a high-probability state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a “high-probability jackpot”. Furthermore, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and a short working time period after the jackpot game is also referred to as a “probable variation jackpot”. In addition, the jackpot in which the game progresses in the normal probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as “time saving jackpot”.

4. Main Effects by Gaming Machine Next, main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 31.

4-1. Performance Mode First, the performance mode will be described. The effect mode is a category of effect (or a superordinate conceptual attribute). The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a probability variation effect mode, a time saving effect mode, and a jackpot effect mode as effect modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, special map variable display is performed in "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". This is an effect mode that can be set when there is not, and is in a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. The customer waiting effect is performed when the customer waiting effect mode is set. In the customer waiting production, for example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed on the display unit 50a. When the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 17B, a setting screen G101 for setting the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Is displayed. The settings relating to the effect include the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, the brightness setting of the display unit 50a, and the frequency setting of the effect to be executed. In addition, the item of the setting related to the effect can be appropriately set. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the operation of the player.

The normal effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the "low probability low base game state" and indicates the normal game state. Further, it is possible to further provide a plurality of lower-order effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as lower-order effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

Note that, in the following, the lower-level effect modes belonging to the effect mode are also referred to as “effect stages”. Along with that, the first normal effect mode is also called "first normal effect stage", the second normal effect mode is also called "second normal effect stage", and the third normal effect mode is also called "third normal effect stage". Say.

When a plurality of effect stages belonging to the normal effect mode are provided in this manner, the effect stages can be sequentially and repeatedly switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set appropriately, but for example, the switching condition can be set such that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Further, as the switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure change effect based on SP reach change is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in the special figure change effect, but the special figure change effect is established in all the sections of the special figure change effect when the reach does not occur and when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is reached when the reach occurs. The former part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

Then, in the front part of the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18A: first normal background image G111) mainly showing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front part of the second normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front part of the third normal effect stage, the display unit 50a displays a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 18C: third normal background image G113). On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode. A dedicated background image corresponding to the reach type is displayed.

The background image dedicated to the reach type in the normal effect mode may be a background image common to the normal effect mode regardless of the effect stage type, or may be a different background image for each effect stage.

Moreover, the normal effect mode may be set in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal effect mode may be an effect mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode which is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Furthermore, in the low-probability low base game state and the high-probability low base game state generated under a certain condition, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the “high-probability-high base game state” and indicates that the high-probability-high base game state. In the front stage part of the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. In the latter part of the probability variation effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the probability variation effect mode is displayed.

The time saving production mode can be set in the "low probability high base game state" or the "high probability high base game state", and is either the low probability high base game state or the high probability high base game state, and at least the time saving It is an effect mode indicating that it is in a state. In the front part of the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18E, a background image representing the sky (time saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the time saving effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving effect mode is displayed.

Note that the time saving effect mode is set only in the low-probability high base game state, and can be set to the effect mode indicating that the low-probability high base game state is set.

Further, for either or both of the probability variation production mode and the time-saving production mode, similarly to the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are further provided, and the production stage is switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. You can

The big hit production mode is a production mode that can be set when the big hit game is being performed in the "big hit game state", and is a production mode indicating that the big hit game is being performed. In the jackpot production mode, for example, during the opening in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19(A), on the display unit 50a, an opening image G1 that suggests the start of the jackpot game and a right-handed image G2 that prompts a "right hit". The jackpot opening effect is displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2 on the display unit 50a. ..

Further, in the big hit production mode, during the round game in the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 19B, a right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display unit 50a, and a round image showing the number of rounds. A round effect is displayed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid prize balls are displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, in the display unit 50a, in the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the number of prize balls image G4, a background image according to the type of the jackpot game (round background). The image G201) is displayed, and the speaker 52 outputs BGM according to the type of jackpot game.

Furthermore, during the ending in the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 19C, the ending image G5 indicating the effect mode set after the big hit game and the total number of awarded prize balls are suggested on the display unit 50a. The big hit ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball number image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6 on the display unit 50a. To be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as a “bonus game effect” as an effect executed in the jackpot game. That is, the big hit game effect is performed in the big hit effect mode.

4-2. Special figure change effect Next, the special figure change effect will be described. When the special display variable display is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts changing the special figure, and changes the special figure and the special lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and Based on the special figure variation pattern determination result), the special figure variation effect is executed.

In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is superposed on the predetermined background image on the display unit 50a. In the variable display of the effect design, the effect is stopped after the effect design changes. That is, after the special figure fluctuation time and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol are performed, the fluctuation is stopped and the stop display of the effect symbol is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect design.

In addition, in the special figure variation effect performed on the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, various rendering devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform a figure variation effect.

Next, in the special figure variation effect executed in accordance with the special figure variable display, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described. The effect design is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types are provided. In detail, one of the components of the effect symbol constitutes identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect symbols are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), the effect design can be configured by numbers 1 to 9, and 9 effect designs can be provided. Here, the number itself constitutes the identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result. Note that the effect symbols composed of the numbers 1 to 9 are strictly different images because the numbers are different. Then, the effect design of the number “1” is set as effect design G10a. Similarly, the effect symbols of the numbers “2” to “9” are referred to as effect symbols G10b to G10i. For the sake of convenience, when the individual effect symbols 1 to 9 are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "effect symbol G10".

The production symbols G10 of "3" and "7" are red, and the production symbols of "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and "9". G10 is blue. That is, a color is also set as a component of the effect design G10. Note that the configuration of the effect design G10 and what to set the identification information may be changed appropriately. For example, other constituent elements such as a character associated with each numeral may be added to the effect design G10.

Next, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 20(B), the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 50a, which are divided substantially horizontally into three parts, have a left effect symbol area 50b1, a middle effect symbol area 50b2, and a right effect symbol. It can be the region 50b3. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3.

Then, particularly in the front part of the special figure variation effect, the effect symbols G10 displayed in the left effect symbol area 50b1 are collectively referred to as "left effect symbol EZ1", and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the middle effect symbol area 50b2 is "middle". The effect symbol EZ2" is generically referred to, and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is generally referred to as "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3, the effect symbol G10 composed of the numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the effect symbol is displayed at a relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it describes with the left production design EZ1, the middle production design EZ2, and the right production design EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, it is possible to provide a small symbol region 50c for variably displaying a small symbol in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display unit 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbols can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbols. It should be noted that the design of the small symbol can be appropriately set, but for example, when the effect symbol is composed of numbers, the small symbol can be configured by reducing the effect symbol as it is. Further, when the effect design is composed of numbers and characters, it is also possible to extract only the number portion to form a small design.

In FIG. 20(B), the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c are clearly indicated by a dot-dash line, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1, It is described in order to represent the range of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

Further, as described above, there are normal variation, N-reach, L-reach, SP-reach, and battle production as the productions that constitute the production flow of the special figure variation production. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. Normal variation The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation effect. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special map has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. In addition, as the small symbols, the left effect symbol EZ1, the medium effect symbol EZ2, and the small symbol KZ1, the small symbol KZ2, and the small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 21(A), in the display unit 50a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is on standby, FIG. As shown in, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

Then, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed immediately after the start of variability display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed at high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically background images G111 to G113, G120, G130, etc. The image on the background side of is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

If the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal loss variation), the variable display of the special figure ends without the occurrence of the reach (the special figure). The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed with a loss eye (so-called “separate eye”) peculiar to the loss without reach.

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 is temporarily stopped at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then shown in FIG. 21(D). Thus, the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped at the substantially central position in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIG. 21(E), the intermediate effect symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped at the substantially central position in the vertical direction.

And finally, as shown in FIG. 21(F), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped in a state of being arranged in the horizontal direction at the substantially central position in the vertical direction are completely stopped all at once and stopped. Confirm (stop display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped are completely stopped due to unevenness, that is, when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It stops all at once with the same slash, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In the example of FIG. 21, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1→the right effect symbol EZ3→the middle effect symbol EZ2, but are temporarily stopped. The aspect is not limited to this, and can be set appropriately.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern with reach loss (for example, N loss variation), as in the case without the reach described above, FIG. As shown in A), the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed. The variable display of the special symbols is started, and as shown in FIG. 22B, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol KZ3 is started. Let's start.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 22(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 related to the number “5” is temporarily stopped at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 22(D), the same number. The right effect design EZ3 related to "5" is temporarily stopped in a line in the horizontal direction at the substantially central position in the vertical direction, and reaches the reach (reach occurs or is established). Even if the reach is established in the effect symbol, the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is continuously performed.

In the example of FIG. 22, when the reach is established, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left effect symbol EZ1→right effect symbol EZ3, but the mode of temporary stop is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. You can Also, the numbers of the effect symbols forming the reach are not limited to "5". Further, the position at which the vehicle temporarily stops is not limited to the vertical center position. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

As described above, the entire period of the special figure variation effect in the case of loss without reach and the section from the start of the special figure variation effect when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established normally change.

4-2-2. N reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform N reach when the reach is established after the normal fluctuation. N reach is an effect that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a “big hit”, and functions as an effect to make the player expect a big hit. Next, the N reach will be specifically described.

When the reach is established, for example, N reach is performed from that point on, as shown in FIG. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 23(A), the state where the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 23(B), the medium effect symbol EZ2 that is displayed in a variable manner (scrolling) at a high speed in the normal mode is gradually decelerated.

If the special figure change pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure change pattern of reach loss (for example, N loss change), the medium effect design EZ2 is temporarily stopped at the vertical center position from the state where the reach is established. Then, the stop display of the effect design showing the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 23(C), the intermediate effect symbol EZ2 made of a number different from the number forming the reach (“4” in FIG. 23(C)) is temporarily stopped. To do. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state as shown in FIG. The stop display of the left effect design EZ1, the middle effect design EZ2, and the right effect design EZ3 is performed.

In addition, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped are completely stopped by a losing eye peculiar to the reachable loss, that is, when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. However, the same stop as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with a reach-specific loss is stopped all at once, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed. The contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special figure variation effect does not end in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes again at high speed, and the reach is maintained and the L reach or L reach is developed (switched).

4-2-3. SP reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. SP reach is an effect that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery was a “big hit”, which is higher than N reach and L reach, and functions as an effect for letting the player expect a big hit. .. Note that, even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, at the start of the SP reach, the effect pattern forming the reach is reduced and the small amount in the display unit 50a is reduced. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the symbol area 50c (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display unit 50a).

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a, an enemy character appears, and subsequently, As shown in FIG. 24B, an image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "in FIG. 24(B), "catch the enemy batter XX!", and an effect image G11b that complements the title image G11a. It

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(C), a scene in which the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character face each other is displayed. The contents of SP reach consist of a baseball pitcher and batter's showdown scene. Here, the main character is a pitcher and the enemy character is a batter.

After that, in the SP reach background image G115, the main character throws the ball as shown in FIG. 25(A), the ball advances toward the enemy character as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character begins to swing the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 25(D), the ball and the bat come close to each other, and a scene in which a battle between the main character and the enemy character is about to be completed is reached. This scene constitutes a turning point (winning loss turning point) of whether the main character wins or loses in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter.

After the winning/losing branch point, if the special figure change pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure change pattern of the big hit (for example, SP big hit change), as shown in FIG. After the enemy character swings empty and wins the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 26(B-1), the hero character who strikes out the enemy character and yells on the mound is displayed and the speaker 52 is displayed. A predetermined sound effect is output. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit.

In this way, the display of the hero character who has won the confrontation and shouting loudly and the output of the predetermined sound effect constitute an effect of notifying the big hit (big hit notification effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 26(C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a mode showing a big hit.

On the other hand, if the special map change pattern of the variable display of the special map is the reach-missed special map change pattern (eg, SP lost change) after the winning/losing branch point, the jackpot notification effect is not given, and the SP reach background is not performed. In the image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 26(B-2), the hero character is discouraged on the mound. A loss notification effect is played.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(C-2), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by the reach eyes. The content of SP reach is not limited to the content where characters are confronted in baseball, but can be changed or added as appropriate.

Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure variation effect will be described. In the case where the movable body effect and the operation effect are performed as a part of these effects by being incorporated in the SP reach or N reach, the jackpot game effect, or the like, or when these effects are performed independently of each other. There is. First, the movable body effect will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body effect accompanied by an operation of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a big hit game effect. The movable body effect is, for example, an effect using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree and development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 27A, in the special figure variation effect, when the N reach is expanded to the SP reach, first, FIG. As shown in (B), the board moving device 55 is operated, the board moving body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view, and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Then, as shown in FIG. 27C, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, a scene in which the main character is displayed large on the display unit 50a is displayed, and the SP reach is developed. The operation contents of the movable device in the movable body effect can be appropriately changed or added.

4-4. Operation effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, or the like at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform an operation effect including. The operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect that is performed in accordance with the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect, and is for each player to expect a jackpot. Functions as a production.

For example, as described above, when the victory/defeat point is reached in SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is effective (first effect button operation effective period) occurs, and this first effect button operation effective period 28A, an effect (first effect button operation promotion effect) that prompts the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed as shown in FIG. 28(A).

In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion image G12 is an image (first effect button image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k and an image (press operation image) representing the operation mode (that is, the pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k. G12b, and an image (first effect button operation effective period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation effective period (first effect button operation effective period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k.

The first effect button operation effective period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period with the passage of time. Changes to. It should be noted that FIG. 28B shows a state in which the first effect button operation effective period has occurred and 1/3 of the first effect button operation effective time period has elapsed.

When the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the big figure special figure variation pattern (for example, SP big hit variation), after the first effect button 40k is pressed down in the first effect button operation effective period, Alternatively, after the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period is exhausted without operating the first effect button 40k in the first effect button operation effective period, the operation result effect is performed.

As the operation result presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 28C, the board movable device 55 is actuated, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operation position, and is held at that position for a predetermined time, and at the same time, the rotating member 55k1. Rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result effect includes the movable object effect. Further, at this time, as the operation result effect, the normal effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28D, the normal effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is lifted to end the operation result effect. When the operation result effect is completed, the jackpot notification effect is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of reach loss (for example, SP loss variation), the first effect button 40k is pressed during the first effect button operation effective period. Or, even if the remaining time of the effect button operation effective period expires without pressing the first effect button 40k, the operation result effect is not performed and the loss notification effect is performed.

The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the movable board device 55 and the display of the normal effect image G13, and can be appropriately changed or added. Further, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure variation effect and can be executed in the big hit effect.

4-5. Pre-reading Effect Next, the pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special-character variable display that is the target of the special drawing is executed is described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform the prefetch effect for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold in which the special figure lottery is not performed, based on the result of the prefetch determination, at an arbitrary timing of the special figure change effect. is there. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect for expecting a big hit from before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the prefetch effect, there is a hold icon notice using a hold effect that represents a special figure hold. Here, the hold effect and the hold icon notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in one section in the center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d includes a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the left-right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display occurs first based on the special figure 1 related random numbers that are generated first among the pending special figure 1 holds. A pending icon representing the reserved special figure 1 pending is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, based on the special figure 1 relational random numbers that occur 2 to 4 out of the pending special figure 1 holds and correspond to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 for which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed at the second to fourth positions.

Note that, in the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in order of hold 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icons displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold of hold order 2" and "holding order 3 Special figure 1 hold”, and “special figure 1 hold with reservation order 4”. That is, the existing special figure 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 50e is formed on the left side of the hold display area 50d. In the variation display area 50e, a variation icon representing the currently-executed special figure 1 variation display is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the variable icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, strictly speaking, it is a "hold effect" according to the special figure 1 hold. Although not included, the display of the hold icon and the display of the variable icon are related, so in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the variable icon are collectively referred to as “holding effect”. .. Further, the hold icon and the variable icon are collectively referred to as “icon”.

Note that, in FIG. 29A, the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are clearly indicated by a dashed line, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly indicated by broken lines. It is described to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the variable display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the holding effect will be described. In the following description, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being displayed (during special figure fluctuation production), and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is “2”. Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 29(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 holds (holding order). The special icon 1 hold (Holding 1) is displayed, and in the above-described second area 50d2 (not shown), the special icon 1 hold that occurs after the special icon 1 hold indicated by the hold icon HA2 (holding order 2) A special hold icon HA3 representing the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the variable display area 50e (not shown) described above, the variable icon HA1 representing the currently-executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 29(B) is a normal mode.

In this way, in the hold effect, the special figure 1 is displayed in order from the left end of the hold display area 50d to the right in the order in which the hold is generated. That is, the variable display of the special symbols that are being held, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbols that is based on the special diagram related determination information stored in the special diagram holding storage unit 105, is individually displayed as a holding icon. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 29C, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the variation icon HA1 that represents the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold indicating the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 not shown moves to the variable display area 50e not shown, and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 not shown does not. It moves to the illustrated first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted to the left by one. This is to start the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2, the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is because the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are adapted to the situation in accordance with the change to the special figure which is started next.

Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the variable display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, it becomes the variable icon HA2 when displayed in the variable display area 50e. That is, as the words preceding the "icon", the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is "hold", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is "change". In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol hold indicated by the hold icon is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as a floating icon. Further, when the hold icon is changed to the variable icon, in other words, the icon is enlarged about twice when it is moved from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, in this situation, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 11 and special figure 1 suspension occurs, as shown in FIG. 29(E), a new suspension is created in accordance with the occurrence of the special figure 1 suspension. The icon HA4 is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) described above.

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the winning/defective information and the special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the hold icon in the normal mode or the special mode based on the winning/losing information and the special figure variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is referred to as "hold icon notice".

The display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, that is, when the hold icon notice is given, the player can expect that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. .. Next, a specific example of the notice of the hold icon will be described. As a specific example of the hold icon notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG. 29(E) is a special mode.

As one type of the hold icon notice, a special mode is set immediately after the hold icon is displayed, in other words, the hold icon notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (at the time of winning the first starting opening 11). Hold icon There is a notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 30(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation of FIG. 29(D)), a game ball wins the first starting opening 11 and the special figure 1 is held. 29. When the occurrence of “” occurs, in the same manner as in the case of FIG. 29E, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) described above in response to the occurrence of the hold of the special figure 1.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 30B, the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 30B) (the hold icon notice is given). In the example of FIG. 30, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after the display, but it may be displayed in the special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of the hold icon notice, there is a hold icon notice type that gives a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, a hold icon change notice is given when shifting the hold of special figure 1. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation of FIG. 29(D)), a game ball wins the first starting opening 11 and the special figure 1 is held. 31B, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 31(B)) is displayed on the second area 50d2 (not shown) described above in accordance with the occurrence of the hold of the special figure 1. Displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 31(C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the variation icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 31(D), it is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 moved to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31D) (the hold icon notice is given). ).

Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of special modes related to the notice of the hold icon so that the jackpot expectation degree varies depending on the type of the special mode. For example, assume that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display modes of the hold icon. Here, white is a normal mode, and green, red, and gold are special modes. The jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set to increase in the order of white<green<red<gold.

Note that the prefetch effect can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Further, the prefetch effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, and for example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, a sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and a movable board. It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as an operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as the presentation mode of the prefetching production, in addition to the production mode that continues without interruption from the execution of the suspension icon change notice by the suspension icon HA to the start of the special figure variation display, the production symbol is stopped. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time the display is performed or when the variable display of the effect symbol is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, the control of the game by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. Then, for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the execution order can be appropriately changed or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as the contents of the process are not inconsistent.

Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a counter, a timer, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like that appear in the control of the game by the game control microcomputer 101 described below. The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 190 to the game control board 100, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 32 from the game ROM 103.

As shown in the figure, in the game control main processing, the game control microcomputer 101 first disables interrupts (S1), and then sets access to the game RAM 104 to allow (S2). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a setting value setting operation for setting the setting value has been performed (S3). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated from the reference state and the set value switch 71 has been pressed. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S4 when determining that the setting value setting operation has not been performed, and proceeds to step S7 when determining that the setting value setting operation has been performed, and sets the setting value. After performing the setting process, the process proceeds to step S8. The setting value setting process will be described later.

In step S4, the game control microcomputer 101 performs setting processing of the game RAM 104 that sets an initial value in a use area of the game RAM 104 that requires an initial value, and in step S5, sends a power supply recovery command to the game RAM 104. It is set in the output buffer and transmitted to the effect control board 120, and in step S6, the set value indicated by the set value data stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is displayed on the set value display 87, and the step is performed. Proceed to S10.

In step S8, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the use area of the game RAM 104 and performs setting processing of the game RAM 104 that sets an initial value in the use area of the game RAM 104 that requires an initial value. In step S9, the RAM clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

In step S10, the game control microcomputer 101 performs CTC activation setting processing for setting the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like to be used, and in step S11, permits interrupts.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process in step S12. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process, the counter values of various random numbers related to the universal symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are incremented by 1 and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of the counter for each random number may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the power is cut off in step S13. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 190. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power is not shut off, the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power is cut off, the interrupt is prohibited in step S14, the access to the game RAM 104 is prohibited in step S15, and the data stored in the game RAM 104 is prohibited. Is stored as backup data, and then waits until the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is cut off.

[Set value setting process]
Next, the setting value setting process (S7) will be described with reference to FIG. In the setting value setting processing, the game control microcomputer 101 first stores the setting value data backed up in the gaming RAM 104 in the setting value storage unit 107 in step S51, and sets the setting value indicated by the setting value data. The value is displayed on the value display 87 (S51).

Next, in step S52, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value switch 71 has been operated. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the set value switch 71 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S55, and if it is determined that the set value switch 71 has been operated, the set value storage unit of the game RAM 104 in step S53. The set value indicated by the set value data stored in 107 is increased by "1" to set a new set value, and the new set value is displayed on the set value display 87 in step S54.

In the basic embodiment, the set value is set in 6 levels from 1 to 6, and when the set value switch 71 is operated when the set value is "6", the set value "1" is newly set. Will be. The manner of changing the set value by operating the set value switch 71 is not limited to "1" increase, and may be "1" decrease or random change.

In step S55, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not there has been an operation for confirming the set value for confirming the set value. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 has turned off the set value cylinder 70 based on the set value cylinder sensor 70a, that is, whether the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated from the set state and returned to the basic state. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is no set value confirmation operation, the process proceeds to step S52, and if it is determined that there is a set value confirmation operation, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 in step S56. The set value designation command indicating the set value indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120, the set value setting process is completed, and the process returns to the game control main process.

It should be noted that the setting value setting process is ended and the setting value is fixed by performing the rotating operation for shifting the setting value cylinder 70 from the setting state to the reference state in step S55. It can be positioned as an operation for making On the other hand, the rotating operation of changing the set value cylinder 70 from the reference state to the set state according to step S3 can be regarded as an operation for setting the set value. In the following, the former operation is referred to as the “set value confirmation operation” of the set value cylinder 70, and the latter operation is referred to as the “set value setting operation” of the set value cylinder 70.

[Game control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control timer interrupt processing will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the game control board 100, thereby causing a game control timer interrupt shown in FIG. Execute the process.

As shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 101 first executes an output process (S101) in the game control side timer interrupt process. In the output processing, the commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each processing described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process, the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and stores it in the game RAM 104 as the lower plate full data. Store in output buffer.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process performed in the game control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers related to the universal figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process and other periods (after the end of the game control side timer interrupt process). , Until the next game control side timer interrupt process is started).

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). The sensor detection processing, normal operation processing and special operation processing will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) and ends the game control timer interrupt processing. As other processing, the timer provided in the gaming RAM 104 is updated. Further, as other processing, payout control processing for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting opening 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting opening 12, the prize ball counter for the special winning opening 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10 are “ It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S13 to S14 of the game control main processing until the interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next, and when the clock pulse is input, the game control is performed again. Execute the side timer interrupt process. The game control microcomputer 101 outputs the command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process in the output process (S101) of the executed game control side timer interrupt process. ..

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If no game ball has been won in the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203. If a game ball has been won in the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls are included. A general winning award prize ball process for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning award ball processing, the number of award balls (for example, “3”) corresponding to the winning in the general winning port 10 is added to the award ball counter for the general winning port 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status = 1 described later, in other words, whether the general figure variable display or the auxiliary game is not performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). When the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207, and when the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) The normal symbol random number shown by is acquired as the general figure related determination information (S205), and the acquired general figure related determination information is stored in the general figure reservation storage unit 106 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207. Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been won in the second starting opening 12, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 12a. When the game ball has not won in the second starting opening 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and when the game ball has won in the second starting opening 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has a predetermined value. A second starting opening prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (eg, “4”) corresponding to the winning in the second starting opening 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting opening 12.

Next, if the special figure 2 reservation number (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 2 reservation number counter) provided in the game RAM 104 for counting the special figure 2 reservation number) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether there is any (S209). If the number of special figure 2 reservations is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the number of special figure 2 reservations is not "4" or more (less than "4") ( (NO in S209), special figure 2 reservation number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 pending number addition processing, the special figure 2 pending number counter is incremented by "1", and the special figure 2 pending number indicated by the special figure 2 pending indicator 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special pattern fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP). The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of (1) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

Next, the second prefetch determination processing is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. 15 is used to identify the second start winning command by comparing the current game state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 holding storage unit 105b (S213).

Succeedingly, in a step S214, it is determined whether or not the game ball is won in the first starting opening 11, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 11a. If the game ball has not been won in the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221. If the game ball has been won in the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball is predetermined. A first starting opening prize ball process for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, “4”) corresponding to the winning in the first starting opening 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting opening 11.

Next, the special figure 1 hold number (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 hold number counter) provided in the game RAM 104 for counting the number of special figure 1 hold) is “4” (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of special figure 1 reservations is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. However, if the number of special figure 1 reservations is not "4" or more (less than) (NO in S216). ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 pending number addition processing, the special figure 1 pending number counter is incremented by "1", and the special figure 1 pending number indicated by the special figure 1 pending indicator 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special pattern fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP). The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of (1) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

Next, the first prefetch determination processing is performed (S219). In the first prefetching determination process, the first prefetching determination table shown in FIG. 14 is compared with the current game state and the special figure 1-related determination information acquired in step S218 to identify and identify the first start winning command. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 holding number in the special figure 1 holding storage unit 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not the game ball is won in the special winning opening 14, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the special winning opening sensor 14a. When the game ball has not been won in the special winning opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection processing is ended, and when the game ball has been won in the special winning opening 14 (YES in S221), the game RAM 104 is stored. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided special winning opening prize counter is "9" or more (S222). The special winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the special winning opening 14 in one round game of the big hit game. The special winning opening prize counter is cleared each time a round game is completed. In the basic embodiment, the prescribed winning number is set to "8". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

When the counter value of the special winning opening prize counter is "9" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the special winning opening prize counter is not "9" or more, that is, less than "9". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the special winning opening winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and the special winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In the special winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (eg, “14”) corresponding to the winning in the special winning opening 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the special winning opening 14.

As a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, a sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided, and based on the fact that the sensor detects the game ball, processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 is performed. Is also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a normal operation process related to control of the universal figure display 82 and the power tube 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing relating to the universal figure display 82 and the power cable 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation processing (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of ordinary symbols and auxiliary games are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), the hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the general symbol reservation storage unit 106. Further, the universal figure variation pattern is determined based on the current game state to determine the universal figure variation pattern, and the variation display of the universal figure variation time corresponding to the determined universal figure variation pattern is displayed on the universal figure display device 82. And change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a general figure fluctuation start command according to the general figure fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 when the general figure fluctuation display is started.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the universal symbol is variably displayed. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the universal symbol variation time has elapsed from the start of the variable symbol display of the running universal symbol (whether or not to end the variable symbol display of the universal symbol). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal display is displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a universal figure fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the variable display of the universal figure.

The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol determination process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the running general figure was started (whether or not the stop display of the general figure is terminated) If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the public figure stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the regular symbol displayed in stop mode is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special action processing]
Next, a special operation process regarding control of the special figure display device 81, the special figure reservation display device 83, and the special winning device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display device 81, the special figure reservation display device 83 and the special winning device 14D is divided into six statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special operation status" (S1501).

When the "special operation status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502), and when the "special operation status" is "2", special symbol fluctuation Perform processing (S1503), if the "special operation status" is "3", perform special symbol determination processing (S1504), if the "special operation status" is "4", jackpot game control If the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a variable symbol display of the special symbol, a process that is performed during the standby when the big hit game is not performed. The special symbol waiting process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is variably displayed. The special symbol variation process will be described later in detail.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game control process to perform a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the jackpot game is over, the special operation status is changed to "5". When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, when all round games are finished and ending is started, an ending command indicating an ending according to the big hit symbol related to the big hit game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game is finished. For example, when controlling in a high-probability state after a jackpot game, the high-probability flag is turned on in the high-probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high-probability state. Further, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the termination condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter, referred to as “high probability prescribed number”) is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104. .. Further, when controlling in the time saving state after the big hit game, the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Further, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the ending condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter, referred to as “time saving prescribed number”) is set in the time saving remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In the game state setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the big hit game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the special symbol waiting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol waiting process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (S1601). If the number of reserved special figure 2 is “0” (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 12, the special figure It is determined whether or not the one-holding number is "0" (S1608). If the special figure 1 hold number is also “0” (YES in S1608), that is, if the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first starting opening 11 is not stored, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is ended, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). The customer waiting flag is turned on (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is completed.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number is “0” but the special figure 1 reservation number is not “0” (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start When there is at least one memory of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning in the mouth 11, the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out first, and the jackpot determination table associated with the current setting value is read. In addition, based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or lost (jackpot determination).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol random number is read and the jackpot symbol type determination (jackpot symbol type determination) is performed based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the symbol designating command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is “miss”, the lost symbol data indicating the loss is set in the special figure buffer, and the symbol designating command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the Toku-zu 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current non-time saving state is present (S1651). If it is in the non-time saving state (YES in S1651), the Toku-zu 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is "big hit". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655. If it is a big hit (YES in S1654), the big hit symbol is selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read, and the reach random number is collated with the reach determination table corresponding to the current game state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "reach" (S1656). If there is reach (YES in S1656), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachable loss is selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if the reach is not present (NO in S1656), the current special figure 1 pending number is confirmed, and in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. From (1), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the number of special figure 1 reservations is selected (S1657), and then the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the special figure variation pattern random number, and collates the special figure variation pattern random number with the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659, The special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern is determined. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 change start command indicating the decided special figure 1 change pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and changes the special figure according to the decided special figure 1 change pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing is ended, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

The special operation timer is updated by 4 ms in other processing in the game control timer interrupt processing. In addition, the special figure 1 variation start command to be set includes information regarding the type of the special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and the special figure variation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). It includes information about the result (information on the special map variation pattern including the presence/absence of reach and information on the special figure fluctuation time).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display device 81a to start the change display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure change time corresponding to the special figure 1 change pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). ..

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 pending storage section 105a by one to the side where it is read from the current position, and at the same time, the special figure 1 pending storage section 105a. The special figure 1 reserved storage unit shift processing for clearing the storage area corresponding to the first reserved area (storage area farthest from the side to be read) is performed (S1612). In this way, the Toku-zu 1 reservations are digested in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613) and decreases the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a by "1" to change it. (S1614), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1616), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1617), and the special symbol waiting process is performed. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol waiting process is ended without executing step S1617.

In addition, in step S1601, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” (NO in S1601), that is, the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting opening 12 is stored in one or more. If there is, the special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) are basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). ..

The special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used in the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same processing as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609), description thereof will be omitted. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table ( Since the processing is the same as that of S1610), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure change time corresponding to the special figure change pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 pending storage section 105b to the side where it is read from the current position by one, and at the same time, the special figure 2 pending storage section 105b. The special figure 2 reserved storage unit shift processing for clearing the storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved area (storage area farthest from the read side) is performed (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 reservations are digested in the order in which they were reserved.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 holding number counter (S1606), and reduces the special figure 2 holding number indicated by the special figure 2 holding indicator 83b by "1" to change it (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the consumption of the special figure 2 reservation is executed prior to the consumption of the special figure 1 reservation. Then, in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is easier to win the jackpot symbol, which is more profitable for the player, than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold. It should be noted that the special figure 1 hold exhaustion may be executed prior to the special figure 2 hold exhaustion. In addition, the special figure 1 hold exhaustion and the special figure 2 hold exhaustion may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether to end the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter=0) (S1701). When the variable display of the special symbol is not ended (NO in S1701), the special symbol variation process is ended, and when the variable display of the special symbol is terminated (YES in S1701), the variable symbol display of the special symbol is displayed. While ending, the stop display of the special symbol according to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or lost special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure fixing time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is finished is output to the output buffer. Is set (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is ended.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 101, in the special symbol determination process (S1504), first, whether or not to stop the stop display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has passed (special It is determined whether or not the operation counter=0) (S1751). When the stop display of the special symbol is not ended (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is ended, and when the stop display of the special symbol is ended (YES in S1751), the current normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) Is determined (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the processing proceeds to step S1757, and if it is in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the gaming control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is in the current time saving state (YES in S1753), the remaining variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the time saving state. The value of the time saving remaining number counter for measuring the number of times (time saving remaining number) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining hour/hour counter (time remaining number) is not "0" (NO in step S1755), the flow advances to step S1757, and if the value of remaining hour counter (hour remaining count) is "0" (in step S1755). If YES, the time saving state is shifted to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. It is determined (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special symbol confirmation process is finished, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset ( The normal gaming state is set.Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0" (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. Also, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts depending on the type of jackpot symbol). The time from the start of the round until the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer. Furthermore, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) according to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

6. Production control by production control board 120 [production control main processing]
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described. The flowchart for controlling the effect described below is an example. Then, for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the execution order can be appropriately changed or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as the contents of the process are not inconsistent.

Further, a counter, a timer, a flag, a buffer and the like appearing in the description of the effect control by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided in the effect control board 120 reads the program of the sub-control main processing shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main processing, first, power-on processing according to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, setting of the effect CPU 122, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and the like are performed.

Next, interruption is prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. The effect determination random numbers include various random numbers for determining effect contents such as a stop symbol pattern determination random number and a special figure variation effect pattern determination random number, which will be described later.

As a method of updating the determination random number counter for various effects, for example, the same method as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 can be used. When updating, the random number values may be added not by one, but by two. This is the same in the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update processing is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special figure variation effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start described later). Command and ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

Upon receiving the command, the image control board 140 displays the image on the display unit 50a according to the received command (executes various effects by the image). In addition, the effect control board 120 causes the speaker 52 to output sound via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various effects by sound), the sub drive board, and various effects performed by the image control board 140. Via the frame 162, the frame lamp 53 is caused to emit light (various effects by light emission are executed), or the movable board 55k is activated (various effects by operation are executed). In addition, as various effects, there are special figure variation effect, jackpot game effect (jackpot opening effect, round effect, jackpot ending effect), customer waiting effect, operation effect, look-ahead effect and the like.

The production control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits interruption (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100. This reception interrupt process is executed prior to the other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse of 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. In the effect control microcomputer 121, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), first, the input process is performed (S4101). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data output process (S4102). In the light emission data output processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 generates the light emission data created in the light emission data creation processing (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the effect produced by the image. Is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode in accordance with the light emission data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) so as to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode in accordance with the drive data.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4104), and finishes the 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis processing will be described in detail in a first embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a voice control process (S4202). In the voice control process, the voice data (data for controlling the output of the voice from the speaker 52) is created and is sent to the voice control circuit 161 on the basis of the effect contents indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124. Is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation processing, the light emission data is created based on the effect contents indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the reception command analysis processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not a start winning command (first starting winning command or second starting winning command) is received from the game control board 100, in other words, a starting winning command is received. It is determined whether the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the start winning command is received (YES in S4301), the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4302, while if the starting winning command is not received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning prize process according to the game ball winning the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the process for starting winning a prize, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command holding storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command, and determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect indicating the jackpot expectation. The pre-reading effect includes, in addition to the hold icon notice for displaying the hold icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of continuous variable display of special symbols. When it is determined to execute these pre-reading effects, a pre-reading effect start command for executing the determined effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetching effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the image ROM 142 to perform a predetermined effect. The image is read out, and the pre-reading effect by the image is performed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the voice according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the prefetch effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed. A voice is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (pre-reading effect by voice is executed), and the frame lamp 53 is turned on via the sub-drive board 162 (pre-reading effect by light is executed). It is possible to operate 55k (execute the look-ahead effect by operation).

In step S4303, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the symbol designating command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the symbol designating command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the design control command is not received (NO in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4305, while if the design control command is received (YES in S4303), the design control command is used to output the design RAM 124. It is stored in the symbol designating command storage unit 126 in (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the special figure fluctuation start command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command is stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the flow proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the effect content of the special figure variation effect is determined. The special figure variation effect start processing (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect is performed.

In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores the special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Next, in step S4304, based on the contents of the stop special figure (type of big hit symbol, lost special figure) indicated by the symbol designating command already stored and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed. ~ EZ3, and select a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination to determine the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol fluctuation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop symbol and the symbol variation pattern. In each of the stop symbol pattern determination tables, a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are random symbol values for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination so that a predetermined distribution rate (%) is obtained. Value) is assigned. Next, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the obtained random number for the stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table, and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special figure variation pattern is a reach variation variation without reach, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to be a so-called "separation pattern". If the special figure variation pattern is a reach variation with reach, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same, and the effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbol KZ1 are different so that the middle effect symbol EZ2 is different from them. A combination of KZ3 is selected. Further, if the special figure variation pattern is a big hit variation, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to be a so-called "double eye" depending on the effect mode and the type of the big hit symbol. ..

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates a special figure variation effect pattern in which the effect contents of the special figure variation effect are associated with each other based on the staying effect mode and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. The special figure variation effect pattern determination table for performing the special figure variation effect pattern determination is selected. A plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each special figure variation effect pattern determination table, the value of the random number for special figure variation effect pattern determination (special figure variation effect pattern is set to one or more special figure variation effect patterns so that a predetermined distribution ratio (%) is obtained. Judgment value) is assigned. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the special figure variation effect pattern as the random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern, and based on the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern determination is performed.

In the special figure variation effect pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the selected special figure variation effect pattern table with the obtained random number for special figure variation effect pattern determination, determines the special figure variation effect pattern, and determines. The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the image ROM 142 to perform a predetermined operation. The effect image is read out, and the special figure variation effect by the image is performed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

In addition to the special figure fluctuation effect by the image displayed on the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation effect start command includes the special figure fluctuation effect by the sound output from the speaker 52 and the special character fluctuation effect by the light emitted by the frame lamp 53. The effect contents of the figure variation effect and the effect contents of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board 55k are included.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121, while the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. In response, the speaker 52 outputs audio through the audio control circuit 161 (executes a special figure variation effect by sound), and the frame lamp 53 emits light through the sub-drive board 162 (special figure by light emission). (Variation effect is executed), and the movable board 55k is operated (special figure fluctuation effect by operation is executed).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the special figure fluctuation stop command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation stop command is stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4307), the production control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4309, while if the special figure fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4307), the special figure fluctuation stop command is received. The special figure variation effect end processing (S4308) for ending the effect (stopping variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and performing stop display) is performed.

The effect control microcomputer 121, in the special figure variation effect end processing, analyzes the special figure variation stop command, and based on the analysis result, ends the special figure variation effect appropriately (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and small symbol KZ1. ~ A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variation display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Upon receiving the special figure variation effect end command, the image control board 140 ends the special figure variation effect that is being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 that are changing).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the game state command is not received (NO in S4309), the production control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4311, while if the game state command is received (YES in S4309), analyzes the game state command. The gaming state specified by the gaming state command is specified, and a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state is performed (S4310).

In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game status flag “00H” in the game status flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game status indicated by the game status command is the normal game status. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game status flag “01H” in the game status flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game status indicated by the game status command is the high-probability/high-base game status. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game status flag “02H” in the game status flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game status indicated by the game status command is the low-probability high-base game status.

In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the customer waiting command is not received (NO in S4311), the production control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4313, while if the customer waiting command is received (YES in S4311), the customer waiting production waiting process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting production standby process, the production control microcomputer 121 sets a waiting time (customer waiting production standby time: 20 seconds, for example) before the customer waiting production is started after the production symbols are stopped and displayed. Set to timer. It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this standby time has elapsed, and if it determines that the standby time has elapsed, the effect RAM 124 outputs a customer wait effect start command for starting the customer wait effect. Set to the output buffer of.

In step S4313, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, while if it has received the opening command (YES in S4313), the jackpot accompanying the start of the jackpot game. Opening effect start processing is performed (S4314).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the big hit opening effect start process, and determines whether to execute the big hit opening effect according to the opening of the big hit game to be executed based on the analysis result. If it is to be executed, the effect contents of the big hit opening effect (big hit opening effect pattern) are selected, and the big hit opening effect start command for starting the big hit opening effect with the selected big hit opening effect pattern is output to the effect RAM 124. Set in buffer.

In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designating command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designating command is stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round effect start processing accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect according to the round game to be started, and if so, the round effect. The effect contents (round effect pattern) are selected, and a round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command is stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the process proceeds to step S4320. If the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process associated with the start of the jackpot game ending (S4318). , And effect mode setting processing (S4319).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start processing, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect corresponding to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and if it executes. The effect content of the big hit ending effect (big hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and a big hit ending effect start command corresponding to the selected big hit ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Moreover, the effect control microcomputer 121, in the effect mode setting process, based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the process of setting the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the jackpot pattern indicated by the ending command (the effect mode. Process for controlling).

For example, the production control microcomputer 121, when the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, sets the probability variation rendering mode that suggests a high-probability/high-base gaming state. Then, an effect mode flag indicating the probability variation effect mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and a probability variation effect mode start command indicating that the probability variation effect mode is set is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probability variation effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing of ending the ending. , The probability changing background image G120 is displayed as a background image, and the probability changing BGM is output as BGM.

Further, the production control microcomputer 121, when the jackpot design indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, the jackpot symbol E, or the jackpot symbol F, a high-probability high-base gaming state or a low-probability-high base. A time saving effect mode is set in which it is difficult or impossible to determine which is the game state. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and outputs the time saving effect mode start command indicating that the time saving effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set to. When the time saving effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing of ending the ending. The background image G130 for time saving is displayed as a background image, and the BGM for time saving is output as BGM.

In step S4320, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the setting value designation command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the setting value designation command is stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the set value designation command (NO in S4320), the reception command analysis process is ended, while if the set value designation command has been received (YES in S4320), the set value designation is performed. A set value setting process for storing a set value flag indicating the set value indicated by the command in the set value flag storage unit 128 in the effect RAM 124 is performed (S4321), and the received command analysis process ends.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 executes the set value effect related to the set value based on the number of game balls that have been discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. The first embodiment will mainly describe differences from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

As described in the basic embodiment, the first start opening sensor 11a, the second start opening sensor 12a, and the like, which are provided with the sensors for detecting the game balls winning the first start opening 11, the second start opening 12, and the like. ing. In the first embodiment, in addition to the sensors for detecting the winning game balls like these sensors, as shown in FIG. 48, the game balls discharged to the outside of the game region 6 after entering the game region 6 An out sensor 19a for detecting is provided.

Although detailed description is omitted, the game balls that enter the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 14 and the game balls that enter the out opening 19 are games. The spheres are gathered on one path (not shown) which can flow down. An out sensor 19a for detecting a game ball is provided on this path. Note that, hereinafter, the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6 are referred to as “out balls”.

With the out sensor 19a being provided, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process of step S104. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, after step S224 of the sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S225 whether or not an out ball has occurred, in other words, whether or not the out sensor 19a detects the game ball. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that an out ball has not occurred (NO in S225), it ends the sensor detection process as it is, while if it determines that an out ball has occurred, in step S226 that the out ball has occurred. The out designation command shown is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the sensor detection process is completed. The game ball set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the output processing in step S107.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 counts the number of generated out-balls based on the received out-ball command. When the jackpot is won after the number of out balls reaches 50,000, the effect control microcomputer 121 may execute a set value effect that suggests a set value in the jackpot opening effect associated with the jackpot. For example, in the set value effect, as shown in FIG. 50, the number of firework images G20 according to the set value is displayed. That is, the number of displayed fireworks images G20 suggests the set value.

If the set value “1” is set, one fireworks image G20 is displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect in which the set value effect is not performed (see FIG. 50(A)). Similarly, if the set value “2” to the set value “6” are set, 2 to 6 fireworks images G20 are displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect in which the set value effect is not performed (FIG. 50). (B) to FIG. 50(F)).

Note that the process for performing the set value effect of the first embodiment can be appropriately set. For example, the effect RAM 124 is provided with an out-ball counter for counting out-balls. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the out-ball command is received after step S4321 of the received command analysis processing, and when it determines that the out-ball command is received, the out-ball counter is incremented by "1". Perform processing to Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the counter value of the out-ball counter is 50,000, that is, whether or not 50,000 out-balls have occurred, and the counter value of the out-ball counter is 50000. If it is determined that there is a setting value effect, the setting value effect flag for performing the setting value effect is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the presence or absence of the set value effect flag in the opening effect start process. In order to cause the image control board 140 to execute, a set value effect start command corresponding to the set value is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S4004. Then, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the number of fireworks images G20 according to the set value in the jackpot opening effect, based on the received set value effect start command.

As described above, by executing the set value effect based on the number of out balls, the game balls that have been fired but entered the out opening 19 are not wasted, so that the player's willingness to play It is possible to prevent the decline of the number of games and improve the operation rate, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, winning the jackpot is included in the conditions for executing the set value effect, so that the player's motivation for winning the jackpot can be maintained.

(Modification of First Embodiment)
In addition, the number of out balls that constitute the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to 50,000, and may be set appropriately. Further, the number of out balls (hereinafter, referred to as “out ball determination value”) for executing the set value effect is not limited to one, and may be set in plural. For example, as shown in FIG. 51, an out-ball determination value may be associated with the set value. As shown in FIG. 51, the out-ball determination value may increase as the set value increases. By doing so, for example, when the jackpot game is played when the number of out balls is less than 34000, if the set value effect is not executed, at least the set value "1" that is most disadvantageous to the player is not Is confirmed, the player can be given a sense of security.

Also, the out-ball determination values that constitute the execution condition of the set value effect are set to 40,000 and 60,000. Then, when the number of out balls reaches 40,000 and the jackpot is won, a suggestion is made that the set value is any of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, in other words, a relatively low value or a high value. 1 Set value performance is performed. In this case, there are two types of effect modes of the first set value effect, the set value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3 in one effect mode, and the set value is in the other effect mode. It is a relatively high value of 4 to 6. Next, when the out-ball determination value reaches 60,000 and the jackpot is won, a second set value effect that suggests any one of the set values 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is performed. In this case, there are three kinds of effect modes of the second set value effect, the set value is either 1 or 4 in a certain effect mode, and the set value is 2 or 5 in another effect mode. And the set value may be either 3 or 6 as long as it is the remaining effect mode. In this way, the setting value may be suggested stepwise by executing the setting value effect.

Further, although the set value effect is executed in the jackpot opening effect, the effect time of the set value effect is not limited to the jackpot opening effect, but may be a round effect or a jackpot ending effect. Furthermore, the set value performance can be executed in the jackpot opening performance of any jackpot game, but only in a specific jackpot game, for example, a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base gaming state. The setting value effect may be configured to be executable. On the contrary, the set value effect may be executed only in a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a low-probability-high-base gaming state.

In addition, two types of out-ball determination values that are thresholds for executing the set value effect may be provided, and the type of jackpot that is a condition for executing the set value effect may be different depending on the out-ball determination value. Set based on winning a specific jackpot related to a specific jackpot game, such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base gaming state, after the number of out balls has reached 30,000 Enable value performance. On the other hand, after the number of out balls has reached 60,000, you have won a non-specific jackpot related to a non-specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base gaming state. Based on the setting value effect. It should be noted that the size of the number of out balls, which is a threshold value for executing the set value effect, and the type of the big hit for executing the set value effect may be exchanged.

Furthermore, the set value effect is executed in the jackpot game when the big hit is won after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, but the set value effect is executed in the special figure variation effect related to the big hit. Is also good. In this case, the execution time of the set value effect is not limited, but at a specific time such as when the special figure variation effect is started, when the reach is established, when the SP reach effect is developed, or when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed. You may set it.

In addition, regardless of the jackpot determination result, after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, the set value effect is SP reach that suggests that the jackpot expectation is high, or a specific effect such as a specific SP reach. May be executed by executing. In this case, for example, when a specific SP reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation is executed among SP reach after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, the set value is set in the specific SP reach. You may execute the performance.

Further, the set value effect suggests the set value by the number of the firework images G20, but the effect mode that suggests the set value is not limited to the number of the firework images G20, and may be set appropriately. For example, the setting value effect may suggest the setting value according to other effect modes such as the size and color of the firework image G20. Further, the set value effect may be executed by using other effect devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board moving device 55 instead of the image display device 50 or in addition to the image display device 50. ..

Further, six kinds of effect modes are set in the set value effect, and each effect mode and the set value are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. However, one effect aspect is associated with a plurality of set values. May be. For example, there are three types of effect modes, the setting value "1" and the setting value "2" are associated with the first effect mode, and the setting value "3" and the setting value "2" are associated with the second effect mode. 4” may be associated, and the setting value “5” and the setting value “6” may be associated with the third effect mode. Further, the setting value "1" and the setting value "6" are associated with the first effect mode, the setting value "2" and the setting value "5" are associated with the second effect mode, The setting value “3” and the setting value “4” may be associated with the third effect mode.

Alternatively, although there are six types of effect modes and all the set values are associated with each effect mode, the possibility of the set values being set may differ depending on the effect mode. For example, the first effect mode to the sixth effect mode are set as the effect modes of the set value effect, and the set value “1”>the set value “2”>the set value “3”>the set value “4”>the setting. There is a high possibility that the set value effect of the first effect mode is executed in the order of the value “5”>the set value “6”, and the set value “6”>the set value “5”>the set value “4”>the setting. The configuration may be such that the set value effect of the sixth effect mode is likely to be executed in the order of value “3”>set value “2”>set value “1”.

Further, the set value effect may be executed not in a form independent of the big hit opening effect and the SP reach effect, but in a form incorporated in the big hit opening effect and the SP reach effect. For example, a set value effect may be executed that suggests a set value depending on the color, size, or display position of the opening image G1 or the right-handed image G2, or the type of the appearing character.

Further, a sensor that detects only the game balls that entered the out opening 19 without detecting the game balls that entered the first starting opening 11 and the like is provided based on the number of game balls that entered the out opening 19. The setting value effect may be executed in the same manner as the setting value effect described above.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. Also in the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 executes the set value effect related to the set value based on the game ball discharged into the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. The second embodiment will mainly describe differences from the first embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

Also in the second embodiment, the out sensor 19a is provided as in the first embodiment. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process, and if it determines that an out ball has occurred, it sets an out designation command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101, in the general winning award ball processing (S202) of the sensor detection processing, the general winning award winning command indicating that the game ball has won the general winning a prize opening 10 in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. set. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special winning opening prize ball processing (S224) of the sensor detection processing, a special winning opening winning command indicating that the game ball has won the big winning opening 14 is output to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. set.

Here, the game ball that has entered the game area 6 enters the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the special winning opening 14, or the out opening 19 and enters the playing area 6 Since it is discharged to the outside, the number of out balls can be said to be the number of game balls that have been normally fired and have been able to enter the game area 6. Therefore, the number of out balls can be positioned as the number of game balls that have been launched. Below, the number of game balls normally fired is also referred to as the “number of fired balls”.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 counts the difference number which is the difference between the number of shot balls and the number of won prize balls. The number of award balls obtained is the number of award balls obtained by entering the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 14. Although the number of prize balls by winning can be appropriately set, in the above example, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the special winning opening 14, 14 game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of shot balls is represented by a negative value, and the number of prize balls is represented by a positive value. Then, for example, 12,000 game balls are shot, three are entered into the general winning opening 10, 150 are entered into the first starting opening 11, five are entered into the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening is entered. It is assumed that 45 balls are entered in 14. In this case, the difference number is (3×3)+(4×150)+(4×5)+(14×45)−12000=−10741.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect when the number of differences reaches −20,000. Unlike the first embodiment, the set value effect can be executed in any of the special figure variation effect, the jackpot game effect, and the demonstration effect. In the set value presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at a height corresponding to the set value. That is, the height at which the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed indicates the set value. In detail, the higher the set value, the higher the position where the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed.

For example, when the number of differences reaches −20,000 when the special map variation effect is being performed, if the setting value “1” is set, the size of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image is the lowest among the setting values. The G21 appears at the right end of the display unit 50a so as to cross the display unit 50a from right to left, moves toward the left, and disappears from the left end. (See FIG. 52A). Similarly, if the setting value “6” is set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at the highest height among the setting values (see FIG. 52(F)). Further, if the set value “2” to the set value “5” are set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at the height according to the set value (see FIGS. 52B to 52E). ).

The process for performing the set value effect of the second embodiment can be appropriately set, but for example, the effect RAM 124 is provided with a difference number counter for counting the difference number. The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the out-ball command is received in the received command analysis process, and if it determines that the out-ball command is received, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the difference number counter. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the general winning award winning command is received in the received command analysis process, and if it is determined that the general winning award command is received, a process of adding “3” to the difference number counter is performed. To do. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command is received in the received command analysis processing, and if it is determined that the winning command is received, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs processing of adding “14” to the difference number counter. To do. In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4301 of the received command analysis processing that the start winning command is received, for example, after the start winning processing, the difference number counter is incremented by "4". Perform processing.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the set value effect determination process after step S4203 of the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012), for example. In the setting value production determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the counter value of the difference number counter is −20000, that is, whether or not the difference number reaches −20000. .. Subsequently, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the counter value of the difference number counter is −20000, in order to cause the image control board 140 to execute the set value effect corresponding to the set value indicated by the set value flag, A set value effect start command corresponding to the set value is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S4004. Then, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 at a height corresponding to the set value based on the received set value effect start command.

As described above, since the set value effect is executed based on the difference number in which the out ball is reflected, the game ball that has been launched but has entered the out port 19 is not wasted, so the game It is possible to prevent a decrease in player's willingness to play a game, improve the operating rate, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Modification of Second Embodiment)
It should be noted that the number of differences constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to −20,000, but may be set appropriately. For example, the number of differences (hereinafter, referred to as “difference number determination value”) for executing the set value effect is not limited to one, but may be set in plural. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the difference number determination value may be associated with the setting value. As shown in FIG. 53, the difference number determination value may decrease as the setting value increases. By doing so, for example, when the number of differences reaches -12000, but the set value effect is not executed, at least it is determined that the set value “1” that is most unfavorable to the player is not set. Can give you a sense of security. The fact that the number of differences increases makes it difficult for the player, but since the set value becomes higher as the situation becomes longer, it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for playing.

Further, the difference number determination value is set to -15000 and -30000. Then, when the number of differences reaches -15000, the first set value effect that suggests that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, in other words, a relatively low value or a high value. To do. In this case, there are two types of effect modes of the first set value effect, the set value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3 in one effect mode, and the set value is in the other effect mode. It is a relatively high value of 4 to 6. Next, when the number of differences reaches -30000, the second set value effect that suggests any one of the set values 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is performed. In this case, there are three kinds of effect modes of the second set value effect, the set value is either 1 or 4 in a certain effect mode, and the set value is 2 or 5 in another effect mode. And the set value may be either 3 or 6 as long as it is the remaining effect mode. In this way, the setting value may be suggested stepwise by executing the setting value effect.

Further, the set value effect suggests the set value by the display position of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21, but the effect mode that suggests the set value is not limited to the display position of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 and may be set appropriately. Is also good. For example, the set value effect may suggest the set value according to other effect modes such as the size, color, moving speed, or number of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21. Further, the set value effect may be executed by using other effect devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board moving device 55 instead of the image display device 50 or in addition to the image display device 50. ..

Further, six kinds of effect modes are set in the set value effect, and each effect mode and the set value are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. However, one effect mode is associated with a plurality of set values. May be. For example, there are three types of effect modes, the setting value "1" and the setting value "2" are associated with the first effect mode, and the setting value "3" and the setting value "2" are associated with the second effect mode. 4” may be associated, and the setting value “5” and the setting value “6” may be associated with the third effect mode. Furthermore, the setting value "1" and the setting value "6" are associated with the first effect mode, and the setting value "2" and the setting value "5" are associated with the second effect mode. The setting value “3” and the setting value “4” may be associated with the third effect mode.

Alternatively, although there are six types of effect modes and all the set values are associated with each effect mode, the possibility of the set values being set may differ depending on the effect mode. For example, the first effect mode to the sixth effect mode are set as the effect modes of the set value effect, and the set value “1”>the set value “2”>the set value “3”>the set value “4”>the setting. There is a high possibility that the set value effect of the first effect mode is executed in the order of the value “5”>the set value “6”, and the set value “6”>the set value “5”>the set value “4”>the setting. The configuration may be such that the set value effect of the sixth effect mode is likely to be executed in the order of value “3”>set value “2”>set value “1”.

Further, the number of differences, which is the execution condition of the set value effect, reflects the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 14, but the number of differences. The types of prize balls to be reflected in may be limited to a part. For example, only the prize balls obtained by entering the special winning opening 14 may be reflected in the difference number which is the execution condition of the set value effect. Alternatively, only the prize balls obtained by entering the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, and the second starting opening 12 may be reflected in the difference number which is the execution condition of the set value effect.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third embodiment can perform variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with an image different from that of the basic embodiment described above. Then, using the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the set value effect indicating the set value is executed. The third embodiment will mainly describe differences from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

First, the effect design that constitutes the set value effect will be described. As the effect symbols related to the set value effect, as shown in FIGS. 54(A) to 54(C), there are a first combined symbol G221, a second combined symbol G222, and a third combined symbol G223. The first composite symbol G221 is used in a variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 on the first normal effect stage. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 is used in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 on the second normal effect stage. The third composite symbol G223 is used in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 on the third normal effect stage. In the following, the first composite symbol G221, the second composite symbol G222, and the third composite symbol G223 are collectively referred to as "composite symbol G22".

The first composite symbol G221 has a first lottery result suggesting section G221a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a first set value suggesting section G221b for suggesting a set value. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 has a second lottery result suggesting section G222a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a second set value suggesting section G222b for suggesting a set value. Further, the third composite symbol G223 has a third lottery result suggesting section G223a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a third set value suggesting section G223b for suggesting a set value.

In the following, the first lottery result suggesting part G221a, the second lottery result suggesting part G222a, and the third lottery result suggesting part G223a are collectively referred to as "lottery result suggesting part G22a". In addition, the first set value suggesting part G221b, the second set value suggesting part G222b, and the third set value suggesting part G223b are collectively referred to as a “set value suggesting part G22b”.

The lottery result suggestion part G22a is the same as the production symbol G10 that is used for the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the basic embodiment and the first to second embodiments. Therefore, it can be said that the composite symbol G22 is configured by adding the set value suggestion unit G22b to the effect symbol G10 in the basic embodiment and the first to second embodiments.

The first lottery result suggestion section G221a is configured by an image in which the numbers "1" to "9" are overlapped on the baseball ball, as in the basic embodiment. Similarly, the second lottery result suggestion section G222a is composed of an image in which the numbers "1" to "9" are superimposed on the baseball glove. Further, the third lottery result suggestion part G223a is composed of an image in which the numbers "1" to "9" are superimposed on the baseball cap.

The number part of the first lottery result suggestion part G221a to the third lottery result suggestion part G223a shown in FIGS. 54(A) to 54(C) is “1”, but the number part is “1”. It illustrates the first lottery result suggestion part G221a to the third lottery result suggestion part G223a in a certain case, and like the basic embodiment, this numeral portion is composed of "2" to "9". The 1st lottery result suggestion part G221a-the 3rd lottery result suggestion part G223a are also provided. Further, as in the case of the basic embodiment, etc., the numbers "3" and "7" of the first lottery result suggestion section G221a to the third lottery result suggestion section G223a are configured in red, and the first lottery The other numeral portions of the result suggestion part G221a to the third lottery result suggestion part G223a are configured in blue.

The first set value suggesting section G221b, the second set value suggesting section G222b, and the third set value suggesting section G223b are composed of the same image showing a shutter that can be opened and closed in the vertical direction. 54(A) to 54(C) represent the first composite symbol G221 to the third composite symbol G223 in a state where the shutters of the first set value suggesting section G221b to the third set value suggesting section G223b are closed. There is. Here, taking the first composite symbol G221 as an example, when the shutter of the first set value suggesting section G221b is opened, the first set value suggesting section G221b is any one of FIGS. 54(D) to 54(F). It becomes a state. Specifically, when the shutter of the first set value suggesting section G221b is opened, "○" is displayed and "△" is displayed in the first set value suggesting section G221b (Fig. 54(D)). There is a case (FIG. 54(E)) and a case where “x” is displayed (FIG. 54(F)).

Note that “◯”, “Δ”, and “x” are also displayed on the second set value suggesting section G222b and the third set value suggesting section G223b, similarly to the first set value suggesting section G221b. In the following, "○" displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b is referred to as "first set value pattern G23a", and "△" displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b is referred to as "second set value pattern". "G23b" and the "x" displayed in the setting value suggesting section G22b is called "third setting value symbol G23c". Furthermore, the first set value symbol G23a to the third set value symbol G23c are collectively referred to as "set value symbol G23".

In addition, since the number displayed in the lottery result suggestion section G22a constitutes identification information for suggesting the special drawing lottery result, the number displayed in the lottery result suggestion section G22a is referred to as "lottery result information". That. Further, since “◯”, “Δ”, and “x” displayed on the set value suggesting section G22b constitute information for suggesting the set value, “◯” displayed on the set value suggesting section G22b. , “Δ”, and “×” are referred to as “setting value information”.

The shutter of the set value suggestion part G22b is opened when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22. Then, when the shutter of the set value suggesting section G22b is opened, the set value is suggested by the combination of the set value patterns G23 displayed in the respective set value suggesting sections G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. That is, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the set value symbol G23 is displayed on each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which constitutes the set value effect.

In addition, regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, any of the first set value symbol G23a to the third set value symbol G23c can be displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b. Therefore, there are 27 types of combinations of the set value symbols G23 that are the effect contents of the set value effects. In the following, the combination of the set value symbols G23 is also referred to as "set value symbol pattern".

In the third embodiment, the set value effect is executed regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, that is, regardless of the type of the effect stage, every time the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. It That is, the set value effect is executed according to the special figure variation effect. The set value symbol pattern is selected each time the special figure variation effect is executed. Which set value design pattern is selected is determined based on the set value that is set. Then, the selection rate for each set value pattern differs depending on the set value. Since the selection rate for the set value pattern differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the set value pattern of the set value effect to be executed.

FIG. 55 shows the selection rate for each set value pattern for each set value. Here, the "set value symbol combination" column in FIG. 55 represents a combination of three setting value symbols G23, and the left end thereof is the setting value symbol G23 displayed in the setting value suggesting section G22b of the left effect symbol EZ1. The center represents the set value symbol G23 displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b of the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right end represents the set value symbol G23 displayed in the set value indicator part G22b of the right effect symbol EZ3. ..

The selection rate of this set value pattern is appropriately set. For example, when the combination of the set value patterns G23 is "○・○・○", the set value "6"=the set value "5">the set value There is a high probability that the set value pattern 1 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of “4”=set value “3”>set value “2”=set value “1”. That is, it is highly possible that the set values are set in this order. Similarly, when the combination of the set value symbols G23 is “×·×·×”, the set value “1”=the set value “2”>the set value “3”=the set value “4”>the set value “5” =There is a high probability that the setting value pattern 27 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of the setting value "6". That is, it is highly possible that the set values are set in this order. Further, when the combination of the set value symbols G23 is “Δ/Δ/Δ”, the set value “3”=the set value “4”>the set value “1”=the set value “2”=the set value “5”= It is highly probable that the setting value pattern 14 corresponding to the combination will be selected in the order of the setting value “6”. That is, it is highly possible that the set values are set in this order.

Here, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. Here, a specific example will be described in which the set value effect is executed in the special figure variation effect of the reachless loss in the first normal effect stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(A), the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and as shown in FIG. 56(B), after the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. When the fluctuation of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is stopped and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the set value effect is executed.

Specifically, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 56(C) to 56(E), the shutter that has been closed by the set value suggesting unit G22b before that is opened. Then, the set value symbol G23 is displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

In addition, in FIG. 56, as the set value effect, the same set value symbol G23 is displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but the set value suggestion part G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. There is a case where all different kinds of setting value symbols G23 are displayed. Further, two of the set value suggestion parts G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may display the same type of set value symbol G23, and the remaining one may display a different type of set value symbol G23. ..

Further, in FIG. 56, the setting value effect is executed in the special figure variation effect of the reachless loss, but similarly in the reachable loss and the special figure variation effect of the big hit, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. At that time, a set value effect based on the set value being set is executed. Further, in FIG. 56, the set value effect is executed in the first normal effect stage, but similarly in the second normal effect stage and the third normal effect stage, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed. A set value effect is executed based on the set value that has been set. However, if it is the second normal effect stage, the variable display and the set value effect of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 using the second composite symbol G222 are performed. Further, in the case of the third normal effect stage, variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 using the third composite symbol G223 and set value effect are performed.

Next, based on FIG. 57, the process for the effect control microcomputer 121 to determine the set value symbol pattern will be described. The set value symbol pattern is determined in the stop symbol pattern determination process in the special figure variation effect start process described above. That is, the stop symbol pattern determination process of the third embodiment is different from the stop symbol pattern determination process of the basic embodiment described above.

In the stop symbol pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first shows, as step S5001, the content of the stop special symbol indicated by the stored symbol designating command (big hit symbol type or lost special symbol) and the special symbol variation start command. Based on the special figure variation pattern, the lottery result information determination table for performing the lottery result information determination for determining which lottery result information the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed is selected.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the lottery result information determination table, the lottery result information determination table used when the stop special symbol is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the stop symbol is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, When the jackpot pattern E or the jackpot pattern F, the lottery result information determination table used when the special figure variation pattern is reach loss, and the lottery result information determination table when the special figure variation pattern is reach loss There is a lottery result information determination table used for.

A plurality of each lottery result information determination table is provided in association with the special figure and the special figure change pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one lottery result information determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure change pattern. In each lottery result information determination table, the numbers displayed on the lottery result suggestion section G22a relating to each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that specifically represent the lottery result information so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 58 is obtained. Values of random numbers for lottery result information determination (lottery result information determination values) are distributed. In addition, a stop symbol pattern is associated with each lottery result information as identification information for identifying the lottery result information.

In step S5002, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for lottery result information determination as the random number for lottery result information determination, and in step S5003, the lottery result information based on the acquired random number for lottery result information determination. Make a decision. The random number counter for lottery result information determination is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

In the lottery result information determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the obtained random number for lottery result information determination with the selected lottery result information determination table, and determines the lottery result information related to the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. .. Then, in step S5004, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets data representing the determined lottery result information in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. In the following, the data representing the determined lottery result information is referred to as “lottery result information data”.

Next, in step S5005, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the set value symbol pattern determination table based on the set value indicated by the set set value flag. As described above, in the set value pattern pattern determination table, the set value symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is "1", the set value symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is "2", and the set value Setting value pattern pattern determination table used when "3", setting value pattern pattern determination table used when setting value "4", setting value pattern pattern determination table used when setting value "5", and There is a set value pattern pattern determination table used when the set value is "6".

Each set value symbol pattern determination table is provided in plurality in association with the set value. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value. In each set value symbol pattern determination table, the value of the set value symbol pattern random number (set value symbol pattern determination value) is distributed to the set value symbol pattern so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 55 is obtained. There is.

In step S5006, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for setting value pattern pattern determination as the random number for setting value pattern pattern determination, and in step S5007, based on the acquired random number for setting value pattern pattern determination. Set value design pattern determination. The random number counter for setting value pattern pattern determination is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update processing in step S4003.

In the setting value pattern pattern determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired setting value pattern pattern determination random number with the selected setting value pattern pattern determination table to determine the setting value pattern pattern. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121, in step S5008, sets the data representing the determined set value pattern in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. In the following, the data representing the determined set value symbol pattern is referred to as "set value symbol pattern data".

Finally, in step S5009, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the lottery result information pattern and the production design command indicating the set value design pattern in the output buffer of the production RAM 124, and ends the stop design pattern determination process.

When the effect design command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the image ROM 142 to generate a predetermined effect image. Is read out, and the lottery result information pattern indicated by the effect symbol command and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with the set value symbol pattern are displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, and the lottery result information pattern is small. Stop display of symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed.

Although not shown, for example, when L reach or SP reach is executed, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are reduced, and the left effect symbol EZ1 moves to the upper left corner of the display unit 50a. The right effect design EZ3 moves to the upper right corner of the display unit 50a. Then, at this time, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 may be composed only of the numeral portion of the lottery result suggestion section G22a, and may be simplified from before entering the L reach or SP reach.

As described above, with the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 executed along with the variable display of the special figure, the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved and the game is played. It is possible to prevent getting tired of. In particular, this effect is basically effective when the loss without reach continues repeatedly and lightly.

Further, the set value effect is executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol similarly to the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but is executed in the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It has not been. As described above, since the set value effects are not executed redundantly, it is possible to prevent the set value effects from being bothered and prevent the effect of the set value effects from being deteriorated.

(Modification of Third Embodiment)
The set value effect in the third embodiment is executed using the composite symbol G22, but the configuration of the composite symbol G22 is not limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, the set value suggestion part G22b related to the set value effect is added to the lower end of the lottery result suggestion part G22a, but the position of the set value suggestion part G22b with respect to the lottery result suggestion part G22a is set appropriately. Is also good. Specifically, the set value suggesting portion G22b may be arranged at the upper end portion, the right end portion, or the left end portion of the lottery result suggesting portion G22a. Alternatively, the set value suggestion part G22b may be arranged so as to overlap the lottery result suggestion part G22a. Further, although the set value suggesting part G22b is smaller than the lottery result suggesting part G22a, the size of the set value suggesting part G22b with respect to the lottery result suggesting part G22a is substantially the same as the lottery result suggesting part G22a or the lottery result suggesting part G22a. It may be set appropriately, such as larger than.

Further, the set value effect is executed by using the composite symbol G22, but as in the basic embodiment, the effect symbol is used by using an image in which the set value suggestion part G22b for suggesting the set value effect is not provided. EZ1 to EZ3 may be executed, and the set value effect may be executed using a symbol different from the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In this case, the setting value effect may be executed by providing an area for the setting value effect on the display unit 50a or by installing an image display device other than the image display device 50.

Further, the types of the set value pattern G23 related to the set value effect of the third embodiment are “◯”, “Δ”, and “x”, but some of them, or “◇” and “□”. The setting value effect may be executed by adding other types such as. Alternatively, the set value effect may be executed by using an image that is completely different from “◯”, “Δ”, and “x”. Alternatively, only one type of the set value design G23 related to the set value effect is set, and only one set value design G23 is displayed in all the set value suggestion parts G22b of the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3. The set value may be suggested.

In addition, the probability that each set value symbol G23 related to the set value effect of the third embodiment is displayed in a uniform manner in all the set value suggestion parts G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is the set value “1” and the set value “2”. , Setting value “3” and setting value “4”, and setting value “5” and setting value “6”, respectively, in the same manner, the setting values in six stages are changed to “small”, “medium”, and “high”. Although they are set separately, the way of dividing is not limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, the probability that each set value symbol G23 is displayed together in all the set value suggestion parts G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be set differently for each set value of 6 stages, or 6 stages. The set value may be set separately for “small” and “high” of the set value “1” to the set value “3” and the set value “4” to the set value “6”.

In addition, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any special figure variation effect, but is not executed in the jackpot special figure variation effect or the special figure variation effect of L reach and SP reach. You may limit the execution condition of value production. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure variation effect, it may be determined whether or not to execute the set value effect, and the set value effect may be executed only when it is determined to execute the set value effect in the determination. ..

Further, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage in the low probability low base game state, but only in a specific normal effect stage. It may be executed. Alternatively, as the production stage in the low probability low base game state, the set value production is not executed in the first normal production stage to the third normal production stage, and the specific production stage in which the set value production can be executed is the first normal production stage. It is also possible to provide the stage other than the third normal effect stage so as to shift to the specific effect stage when the specific condition is satisfied.

The specific condition can be set appropriately. For example, the specific condition is set to determine whether or not to move to the specific effect stage each time the special figure variation effect related to the loss is finished, and to determine to move to the specific effect stage in the determination. Is also good. Further, the specific condition may be set to the execution of a specific effect such as SP reach effect or demonstration effect. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the special figure variation effect started next may be shifted to a specific effect stage. In this case, the background image may be a background image dedicated to a particular performance stage. Alternatively, the background image is not changed, but the image used for variably displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be changed from the effect symbol G10 to the composite symbol G22.

Further, the set value effect is executed when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, but the execution time of the set value effect is not limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, the execution time of the set value effect is set when the reach is established, and when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped when the reach is established, the shutter of the set value suggestion part G22b is opened to set the first set value. Any one of the symbol G23a, the second setting value symbol G23b, and the third setting value symbol G23c is displayed, and the set value displayed in the setting value suggestion part G22b for the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 at that time. The set value may be suggested by a combination of the symbols G23.

Further, the shutter is displayed in the set value suggestion part G22b until the set value design G23 is displayed in the set value effect, and the set value design G23 is hidden, but during the variable display of the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3, The set value symbol G23 is visible, and may be displayed in a variable manner, for example, like a reel or a roulette wheel of a so-called "turning type gaming machine".

Further, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed only in the low-probability low-base game state, but may be executed in the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state. Alternatively, it may not be executed in the low-probability low-base game state, but may be executed in the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a set value effect that suggests a set value under conditions different from those of the above-described first to third embodiments. Specifically, the set value effect is executed based on the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The fourth embodiment will mainly describe differences from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

First, a description will be given of the number of times of execution of special variable display that triggers the execution of the set value effect in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, when the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is the specific number of times and the jackpot is won, the set value effect is executed. In the following, the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is referred to as “the number of times after insertion”.

The specific number of times is associated with so-called "double eyes". The specified number of times is the number of times after the injection that the last three digits are the same odd number, the number of times after the injection that the last three digits are the same even number, the number of times after the injection that the last two digits are the same odd number, and the last two digits Is the same even number of times after the injection. In the following, the number of times after the injection that the last three digits are the same odd number is referred to as the “first odd number of times specified”, and the number of times after the injection that the last three digits are the same even number is the “first even number of specified times” The number of times after the injection that the last two digits are the same odd number is referred to as the "second odd number of times", and the number of times after the injection that the last two digits are the same number of even numbers is the "second even number of times" Called. The second odd number of identifications does not include the first odd number of identifications. Further, the second even number of times of identification does not include the first even number of times of identification.

When the set value “3” or the set value “5” is set, and the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display when the number of times after insertion is the first odd number of times, the production control microcomputer 121 causes the jackpot. In the jackpot game according to, the set value effect that suggests that the set value is 3 or 5 is executed. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as an “odd high setting suggestion effect”.

When the set value “4” or the set value “6” is set, and the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display when the number of times after throwing is the first even number of times, the effect control microcomputer 121 is associated with the jackpot. In the jackpot game, a setting value effect that suggests that the setting value is 4 or 6 is executed. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as "even high setting suggestion effect".

Then, when the set value "1", the set value "3", or the set value "5" is set, and the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display when the number of times after insertion is the second odd number of times specified, the jackpot is controlled. The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect that suggests that the set value is 1, 3, or 5 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as an “odd setting suggestion effect”.

Then, when the set value “2”, the set value “4”, or the set value “6” is set, and the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display when the number of times after throwing is the second even number of times specified, the jackpot is controlled. The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect that suggests that the set value is 2, 4, or 6 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. In the following, this setting value effect is referred to as "even setting suggestion effect".

Next, a specific example of the set value effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the odd high setting suggesting effect will be described. For example, when the set value “3” or the set value “5” is set and the number of times after insertion is the first odd number of times such as 555, 777, 1111, and 1333, the special figure variable display wins the jackpot. I will. Here, when the special map variable display related to the jackpot is finished, the jackpot game is started next, the round game proceeds, and the final round game is performed as shown in FIG. 59(A).

Then, when the ending is started and the round effect is about to be switched to the jackpot ending effect, the odd high setting suggesting effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(B), an image (hereinafter referred to as an “odd height setting image G31”) indicating that the setting value is 3 or 5 is cut in all over the display unit 50a. Is displayed.

The odd high setting image G31 includes the back view of the player wearing the baseball uniform with the uniform number “35”. This jersey number suggests that the set value is 3 or 5. Further, in the odd number high setting image G31, the player is urged to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the odd number high setting image G31, that is, the odd number high setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the odd number high setting image G31 is switched to the ending background image G202 as shown in FIG. 59(C). The odd number high setting image G31 is erased, the odd number high setting suggesting effect ends, and the jackpot ending effect starts.

Next, the even high setting suggestive effect will be described. For example, when the set value “4” or the set value “6” is set and the number of times after insertion is the first even number of times such as 666, 888, 1222, and 1444, the special figure variable display wins the jackpot. I will. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the jackpot is finished, the jackpot game is started next, the round game proceeds, and the final round game is performed as shown in FIG. 60(A).

Then, when the ending is started and the round effect is about to be switched to the jackpot ending effect, the even high setting suggesting effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(B), an image (hereinafter, referred to as “even number high setting image G32”) indicating that the setting value is 2 or 4 is cut in all over the display unit 50a. Is displayed.

The even-high setting image G32 includes the back view of the player wearing the baseball uniform with the uniform number “46”. This jersey number suggests that the set value is 4 or 6. In the even-high setting image G32, the player is urged to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the even height setting image G32, that is, the even height setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the even height setting image G32 is switched to the ending background image G202, as shown in FIG. The even height setting image G32 is erased, the even height setting suggesting effect ends, and the jackpot ending effect starts.

Next, the odd number setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, the special value when the set value “1”, the set value “3”, or the set value “5” is set, and the number of times after insertion is the second odd number of times such as 55, 77, 133, and 211. Suppose you win the jackpot in a variable display. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the jackpot is finished, the jackpot game is started, and as shown in FIG. 61(A), the jackpot opening effect is performed.

Then, when one round is started and the big hit opening effect is about to be switched to the round effect, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(B), an image (hereinafter, referred to as an “odd setting image G33”) indicating that the setting value is 1, 3 or 5 is cut on the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

The odd number setting image G33 includes the back view of the player wearing the baseball uniform with the uniform number “135”. This jersey number suggests that the set value is 1, 3 or 5. Further, in the odd number setting image G33, the player is urged to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the odd number setting image G33, that is, the odd number setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the odd number setting image G33 is switched to the round background image G201, as shown in FIG. G33 is erased, the odd number setting suggestion effect is ended, and one round effect is started.

Next, the even number setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, the special value when the set value “2”, the set value “4”, or the set value “6” is set, and the number of times after insertion is the second even number of times such as 66, 88, 122, and 344. Suppose you win the jackpot in a variable display. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the jackpot is finished, the jackpot game is started, and as shown in FIG. 62(A), the jackpot opening effect is performed.

Then, when one round is started and the big hit opening effect is about to be switched to the round effect, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(B), an image (hereinafter referred to as “even setting image G34”) indicating that the setting value is 2, 4, or 6 is cut on the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

The even number setting image G34 includes the back view of the player wearing the baseball uniform with the uniform number "246". This jersey number suggests that the set value is 2, 4 or 6. Further, in the even number setting image G34, the player is urged to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the even-numbered setting image G34, that is, the even-numbered setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the even-numbered setting image G34 is switched to the round background image G201, as shown in FIG. G34 is erased, the even number setting suggestion effect ends, and the round effect for one round is started.

Next, a process of determining whether or not the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. 63. This process is executed as a set value effect determination process immediately after the special figure variation effect end process when it is determined that the special figure variation start command is received in step S4305 of the received command analysis process (S4201).

In the setting value effect determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 first increments the counter value of the after-insertion number counter, which counts the number of times after insertion, by “1” in step S 5101. The post-insertion number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is incremented by "1" every time the set value effect determination process is performed.

Next, in step S5102, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines, based on the stored special figure variation start command or the like, whether or not the jackpot variation will start. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the jackpot variation is not started, the setting value presentation determination process is ended, and when it is determined that the jackpot variation is started, in step S5103, the post-insertion number counter is checked to determine whether the jackpot number is below the insert number. It is determined whether the three digits are the same number.

If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the lower three digits are not the same number, the process proceeds to step S5109. If it is determined that the lower three digits are the same number, the production control microcomputer 121 checks the post-insertion number counter in step S5104. Is an odd number and the same number. If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the lower three digits are not the same number of odd numbers, the process proceeds to step S5107, and if the lower three digits are the same number of odd numbers, the process proceeds to step S5105.

In step S5105, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag that has been set, and determines whether the set value is 3 or 5. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 3 nor 5, the process proceeds to step S5112. When it is determined that the set value is 3 or 5, in step S5106, the odd high setting suggesting production flag is produced. It is set in the set value effect flag area of the RAM 124, and the set value effect determination process is ended.

In step S5107, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag that has been set, and determines whether the set value is 4 or 6. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 4 nor 6, the process proceeds to step S5114. When it is determined that the set value is 3 or 5, in step S5108, the even high setting suggestive production flag is produced for production. It is set in the set value effect flag area of the RAM 124, and the set value effect execution determination process is ended.

In step S5109, the production control microcomputer 121 checks the post-insertion number counter to determine whether or not the last two digits of the post-insertion number are the same number. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the lower two digits are not the same number, it ends the setting value production determination process, and when determining that the lower two digits are the same number, in step S5110, it checks the post-insertion number counter. , It is determined whether the last two digits are an odd number and the same number. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the lower two digits are not the same number of odd numbers, the process proceeds to step S5113, and if the lower two digits are the same number of odd number, the process proceeds to step S5111.

In step S5111, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set set value flag to determine whether the set value is 1, 3, or 5. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 1, 3, or 5, it ends the set value effect determination processing, and when it determines that the set value is 1, 3, or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112. ..

In step S5112, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the odd number setting suggestion effect flag in the setting value effect flag area of the effect RAM 124, and ends the setting value effect determination process.

In addition, in step S5113, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag that has been set, and determines whether the set value is 2, 4, or 6. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 2, 4, or 6, it ends the set value production determination processing, and when it determines that the set value is 2, 4, or 6, the process proceeds to step S5114. ..

In step S5114, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets an even number setting suggestion effect flag in the set value effect flag area of the effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process.

The production control microcomputer 121 sets an odd number high setting suggestion production flag, an even number high setting suggestion production flag, an odd number setting suggestion production flag, or an even number setting suggestion production flag, and in the jackpot game, based on the set set value production flag. , The odd number high setting suggestion effect, the even number high setting suggestion effect, the odd number setting suggestion effect, or the even number setting suggestion effect is caused to be executed by the image control board 140.

For example, when the odd number high setting suggestion effect flag or the even number high setting suggestion effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets an odd number indicating the effect contents of the odd number high setting suggestion effect in the ending effect start process (S4318). A high-setting suggestive effect start command or an even-high setting suggestive effect start command indicating the effect contents of the even-high setting suggestive effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd number high setting suggesting effect start command or even number high setting suggesting effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

When the image control board 140 receives the odd number high setting suggestive effect start command or the even number high setting suggesting effect start command, the odd number high setting image G31 or the even number high setting image G32 is displayed on the display unit 50a at the start of the ending. The odd number height setting image G31 or the even number height setting image G32 is displayed in a cut-in manner to execute the odd number height setting suggestion effect or the even number height setting suggestion effect, and then the jackpot ending effect is performed.

When the odd number setting suggestion effect flag or the even number setting suggestion effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the odd number setting suggestion effect indicating the effect contents of the odd number setting suggestion effect at the opening effect start (S4314). A command or an even setting suggestion effect start command indicating the effect contents of the even setting suggestion effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd number setting suggestion effect start command or the even number setting suggestion effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

When the image control board 140 receives the odd number setting suggesting effect start command or the even number setting suggesting effect start command, the odd number setting image G33 or the even number setting image G34 is displayed immediately before the opening ends and the round game starts. The odd-numbered setting image G33 or the even-numbered setting image G34 is cut-in-displayed on the entire display unit 50a to execute the odd-numbered setting suggestion effect or the even-numbered suggestion effect, and then the round game effect is performed.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is set to an odd number, if the last two digits of the number of times after throwing in or the last three digits are the same number of an odd number, a jackpot is won, A set value suggesting effect that suggests that an odd set value is set is executed. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is set to an even number, and when the jackpot is won when the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after insertion is an even number, it is an even number. A suggestion setting value effect that suggests that the setting value is set is executed. In this way, since the set value effect that suggests the set value is executed based on the number of times after insertion that is related to the set value, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of times after insertion and improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

Also, when the lower three digits that occur relatively infrequently have the same number, the setting value effect with a narrower range of setting values is executed, so the setting value effect can be sharpened and the game is played. The interest is improved.

(Modification of Fourth Embodiment)
The set value effect in the fourth embodiment is executed using the odd number height setting image G31, the even number height setting image G32, the odd number setting image G33, and the even number setting image G34, but the image design is not limited to this and may be appropriately performed. You may set it. The odd number height setting image G31, the even number height setting image G32, the odd number setting image G33, and the even number setting image G34 are collectively referred to as “setting value suggestion images G31 to G34”.

Further, the set value presentation is performed by, for example, displaying the set value suggestive images G31 to G34 in a cut-in display on the entire display unit 50a, but the display form is not limited to this and may be set appropriately. .. For example, the set value effect may be executed by displaying an object image that is not the entire display unit 50a on the display unit 50a. Further, the set value effect may be executed using specific elements of the opening background image G200, the round background image G201, and the ending background image G202, for example, the character type, color, size, and shape. Further, instead of the image display device 50, or in addition to the image display device 50, another effect device such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, and a movable board device 55 may be used to execute the set value effect. .. Furthermore, the effect contents of the four set value effects may be the same. In this case, only the number of times after insertion is a clue to specify the set value suggested by the set value effect, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, the setting value effect of the fourth embodiment is, in the jackpot game, in detail, the odd number high setting suggesting effect and the even number setting suggesting effect are executed between the round effect and the jackpot ending effect, and the odd number setting suggesting effect. , And the even-number setting suggestion effect are executed between the big hit opening effect and the round effect, but the execution timing is not limited to these and may be appropriately executed. In addition, the execution times of the four set value effects may be set at the same time or may be set at different times. Alternatively, it is possible to set a plurality of execution times of the set value effect and determine the execution time by a predetermined lottery.

Further, the set value effect of the fourth embodiment is executed in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won at a specific number of times after insertion, but is executed in the special map variable display related to the jackpot. May be. For example, the set value effect may be executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot, when the reach is established, when the SP reach is developed, or at a specific timing of the special figure effect effect. ..

Further, the conditions for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment include the jackpot winning, but instead of the jackpot winning, SP reach or a specific SP reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation, etc. The execution of the specific effect may be a condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment. In this case, the set value effect may be executed at a specific timing of the special figure variation effect in which the specific effect is executed.

Further, the condition that the lower two digits or the lower three digits of the number of times after the throw-in is the same is included in the condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment, but the condition is not limited to this. , May be set appropriately. For example, the execution condition of the set value effect may be that the value obtained by adding the respective numbers of times after the insertion is an odd number or an even number. And, for example, when the set value is an odd number, and when the value obtained by adding the respective numbers of times after insertion is an odd number and the jackpot is won, the set value production that suggests that the set value is an odd number is executed, and the setting is performed. If the value is an even number, and if the value obtained by adding the respective numbers of times after insertion is an even number and the jackpot is won, then a set value effect may be executed that suggests that the set value is an even number.

Furthermore, the condition of the number of times after insertion for executing the set value effect may be either one of the lower two digits or the lower three digits of the number after insertion. Furthermore, when the condition of the number of times after insertion for executing the set value effect is the last four digits or the last five digits of the number after insertion is a doublet, an effect of informing the set value may be performed. .. Further, the upper two digits or the upper three digits of the post-insertion number may be set as the post-insertion number condition for executing the set value effect.

In addition, the types of set value effects include odd setting suggesting effects that suggest that the setting value is 1, 3, or 5, and odd high setting suggesting effects that suggest that the setting value is 3 or 5, and setting values. Are even setting suggestive effects that suggest that the setting value is 2, 4, or 6, and even high setting suggestive effects that suggest that the setting value is 4 or 6, but are not limited to this and can be set appropriately. Is also good. For example, only some of these types of set value effects may be executable. In addition, for example, it is possible to execute an odd low setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is 1 or 3 and an even low setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is 2 or 4. Is also good.

Further, in the set value effect execution determination process, when it is determined in step S5105 that the set value is not 3 or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112, and odd number setting suggestion effect is executed. If it is determined that the set value is not 4 or 6 in step S5107, the process advances to step S5114 to execute the even number setting suggestion effect. However, if it is determined in step S5105 that the setting value is not 3 or 5, or if it is determined in step S5107 that the setting value is not 4 or 6, the setting value effect determination processing is ended and the odd number setting suggestion effect or even number setting is performed. The suggestive effect may not be executed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the set value effect is executed based on the number of times the special display is variably displayed after the power is turned on, but the effect regarding the set value is performed based on the number of times the jackpot game is executed after the power is turned on. You can run it. Alternatively, the effect regarding the set value may be executed based on the number of times of executing a specific jackpot game after the power is turned on. As a specific jackpot game here, a jackpot game in which the game is controlled in a high-probability/high-base game state after the jackpot game, a jackpot game in which the game is controlled in a high-probability state after the jackpot game, and After the big hit game, the big hit game in which the game is controlled in a time saving state may be set.

The execution timing of the effect on the set value in this case can be set appropriately, but the effect on the set value may be executed in the jackpot game, and the effect on the set value is executed in the subsequent probability variation effect mode and time saving effect mode. You may. Alternatively, the effect regarding the set value may be executed in the first demonstration effect thereafter. Further, in the special figure variation effect before the jackpot game is performed, the effect regarding the set value may be executed.

In addition, in general, the number of executions of the jackpot game is much smaller than the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure, so the number of executions of the jackpot game or a specific jackpot game is two digits or more as an effect regarding the set value. If the last two digits are the same number, a setting value effect that suggests a setting value that has a one-to-one correspondence with the set setting value as in the first embodiment may be executed. Alternatively, if the setting value is 1 to 3, a low setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is relatively low is executed, and if the setting value is 4 to 6, the setting value is relatively low. You may make it perform the suggestion high setting suggestion production.

In addition, as the execution condition of the effect regarding the set value, it may be set that the number of times of executing the big hit game or the specific big hit game after the power is turned on is a specific number such as 10 times or 20 times. Further, as the execution condition of the effect related to the set value, the so-called "number of consecutive chan" may be set to a specific number such as 10 times or 20 times. Also, the last two digits of the so-called "number of consecutive chan" may be set to be the same number. The number of consecutive chan is the number of times that the big hit game is continuously executed without entering the normal game state after the big hit game is executed, and includes so-called "pullback". However, the number of consecutive chan may not include pullback.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the fifth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the set value effect that suggests the set value by using the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are normally changing. The fifth embodiment will mainly describe differences from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

In the fifth embodiment, variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed using the same effect symbol G10 as in the basic embodiment. However, regarding the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation, the stop display of the effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation that also serves as the set value effect, and the effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation that does not also act as the set value effect. It differs from the basic embodiment in that there is a stop display.

First, an example of a stop symbol pattern determination process including a process of determining whether or not to perform the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation which also serves as the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

In the stop symbol pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5201 whether or not the special figure variation pattern indicated by the stored special figure variation start command is a normal variation. If it does not normally fluctuate, the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5206, and if it fluctuates normally, in step S5202 the value indicated by the set value effect execution determination random number counter is acquired as the set value effect execution determination random number, and step S5202 is performed. In S5203, the setting value effect execution determination is performed based on the acquired setting value effect execution determination random number. The random number counter for setting value effect execution determination is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

The set value effect execution determination is executed using the set value effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 65, the set value effect execution determination table includes a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure variation pattern is the normal A loss variation, and a special value variation pattern is the normal B loss variation. There are a set value effect execution determination table used, and a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure variation pattern is a normal C deviation variation. That is, a plurality of set value effect execution determination tables are provided in association with the special figure variation pattern related to the normal variation. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value effect execution determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern when performing the set value effect execution determination.

In each set value effect execution determination table, the value of the set value effect execution determination random number (the set value effect execution determination value) is set to indicate whether or not the set value effect can be executed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. It is distributed. The set value effect execution determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

In the setting value effect execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired setting value effect execution determination random number with the selected setting value effect execution determination table, and determines whether or not to execute the set value effect. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S5204 whether or not to execute the set value effect as a result of the set value effect execution determination. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the set value effect, the process proceeds to step S5205, and if it is determined not to execute the set value effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5206.

In step S5205, the production control microcomputer 121 selects a set value production stop symbol pattern determination table for performing stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 without reach and also serving as the set value production. In addition, in step S5206, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the normal stop symbol pattern determination table for performing the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that do not also serve as set value effects.

As shown in FIG. 66, the set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table is associated with the set value. Specifically, in the set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table, the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value "1", the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value "2", setting Stop symbol pattern determination table used when the value "3", stop symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value "4", stop symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value "5", and setting value There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used when "6". Therefore, in step S5205, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value.

In each set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) is distributed to the stop symbol pattern so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 66 is obtained. There is.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 68, the normal stop symbol pattern determination table is associated with the stop symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, in the normal stop symbol determination table, the stop special pattern is a jackpot pattern A, or a stop symbol pattern determination table used when the jackpot symbol D, the stop special symbol is a jackpot symbol B, a jackpot symbol C, a jackpot. Stop symbol pattern determination table used when the symbol E or jackpot symbol F, stop symbol pattern determination table used when the special figure variation pattern is reach loss, and when the special figure variation pattern is no reach loss There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used. Therefore, in step S5206, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the normal stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop symbol indicated by the symbol designation command or the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command.

In each normal stop symbol pattern determination table, the random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) is distributed to the stop symbol pattern so that the selection ratio (%) shown in FIGS. 67 to 68 is obtained. ing.

Production control microcomputer 121, in step S5207, obtains the value indicated by the random number counter for stop symbol pattern determination as a random number for stop symbol pattern determination, and in step S5208, acquires the random number for stop symbol pattern determination in step S5205, or A stop symbol pattern determination for determining a stop symbol pattern by collating with the stop symbol pattern determination table selected in step S5206 is performed. The stop symbol pattern determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

Then, in step S5209, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the stop symbol pattern data representing the determined stop symbol pattern in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and in step S5210, the stop symbol pattern command representing the determined stop symbol pattern. Is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the stop symbol pattern determination process ends.

When the effect symbol command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the image ROM 142 to generate a predetermined effect symbol. G10 is read out, and on the display section 50a of the image display device 50, the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in the stop symbol pattern indicated by the stop symbol pattern command, and the stop symbols of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed.

Here, the set value effect using the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, six types of stop symbol patterns 61 to 66 are set as the stop symbol patterns related to the set value effects. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by these six stop symbol patterns also serves as the set value effect.

The stop symbol pattern 61 consists of 1 (blue), 3 (red), and 5 (blue) stop symbols. Since the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 forming the stop symbol pattern 61 are all odd numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 61 suggests that the set value is odd.

The stop symbol pattern 62 is composed of 2 (blue), 4 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 forming the stop symbol pattern 62 are even numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 62 suggests that the set value is an even number.

The stop symbol pattern 63 is composed of 1 (blue), 2 (blue), and 3 (red) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 forming the stop symbol pattern 63 represent relatively low setting values among the setting values, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 63 is: Suggests a low set point.

The stop symbol pattern 64 is composed of 4 (blue), 5 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 forming the stop symbol pattern 64 represent relatively high setting values among the setting values, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 64 is: Suggests a high set point.

The stop symbol pattern 65 is composed of 6 (blue), 5 (blue), and 1 (blue) stop symbols. From the left, the numbers included in the effect symbols G10 that form the stop symbol pattern 65 are "mu (6) 5 (5) ii (1)", which is a verb that means "great". The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 65 suggests that the setting value "1" is the most disadvantageous to the player.

The stop symbol pattern 66 is composed of 3 (blue), 1 (blue), and 5 (blue) stop effect symbols. When read from the left, the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 that forms the stop symbol pattern 66 become a word "Sa (3) I (1) Ko (5)" that means "the highest degree". Therefore, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 66 suggests that the setting value "6" is most advantageous to the player.

Then, in the case of the set value “1”, the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 60%, the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 65 is selected with a probability of 5%. In the case of the setting value "2", the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 55%, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 45%. In the case of the setting value "3", the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 45%, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 55%. In the case of the setting value "4", the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 60%. In the case of the setting value "5", the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 65%. In the case of the setting value "6", the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 25%, the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 70%, and the stop symbol pattern 66 is selected with a probability of 5%.

In addition, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation which does not also serve as the set value effect, and the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation which also serves as the set value effect, Do not overlap. In the following, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation that also serves as the set value effect is referred to as a "specific stop symbol pattern". Moreover, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation which does not also serve as the set value effect is referred to as a "non-specific stop symbol pattern".

As described above, in the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 without reach, the display content of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, specifically, the set value effect is executed by the number portion included in the effect symbol G10, It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to improve the enjoyment of the game while paying attention to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the reachless loss, which is the most uninteresting for the player.

Further, as for the set value "2" to the set value "5", like the stop symbol pattern 65 and the stop symbol pattern 66 for the set value "1" and the set value "6", the stop that directly suggests the set value Although the symbol pattern is not set, the set value can be estimated by the combination of the appearing stop symbol patterns. Since the set value is also suggested by the combination of the stop symbol patterns that appear in this way, the enjoyment of the game is further improved.

Further, for the stop symbol pattern 61, the selection rate is high in the order of set value “1”>set value “3”>set value “5”. Further, for the stop symbol pattern 62, the selection rate is high in the order of set value “2”>set value “4”>set value “6”. As for the stop symbol pattern 63, the selection rate is high in the order of set value “3”>set value “2”>set value “1”. Further, for the stop symbol pattern 64, the selection rate is high in the order of set value “6”>set value “5”>set value “4”. In this way, the predetermined stop symbol pattern can appear with a plurality of setting values, and the selection rate varies depending on the setting value, so that the setting value can be estimated by the appearance frequency of the stopping symbol pattern. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

(Modification Example of Fifth Embodiment)
The stop effect design constituting the specific stop design pattern is not limited to the stop effect design shown in FIG. 66 and may be set appropriately. Further, in addition to the loss without reach, the set value effect may be executed by the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the loss with reach and the big hit. Further, the setting value effect is performed when it is determined by the setting value effect determination that the setting value effect is executed, but the execution condition of the setting value effect is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. For example, after the SP reach loss variation, it is set as the execution condition of the set value effect that the special figure variation effect of the reachless loss is performed in a specific period such as a predetermined number of times, for example, 10 times the special figure variation effect is executed. May be.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the sixth embodiment, when the set value is high, the effect contents that do not appear when the set value is low are performed. As an example, when the set value is high, a big hit may occur when the set value is low, which is not a big hit. The sixth embodiment will mainly describe differences from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

As described above, for example, when the content of the SP reach is composed of a baseball pitcher and batter's confrontation scene, if the special figure variation pattern related to the special figure variation production is the SP loss variation, the SP reach proceeds. After reaching the turning point, the enemy character hits the home run and loses the confrontation, and the main character is discouraged on the mound. Is performed (FIG. 26(A-2), FIG. 26(B-2), FIG. 26(C-2)). Then, if there is a special figure reservation, the next special figure variation effect is immediately executed.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, when the set value is 5 or 6, in the SP reach related to the big hit, when the victory/defeat point is reached (FIG. 69(A)), the enemy character then hits a home run and confronts. (Fig. 69(B)), and the main character's disappointment notification effect on the mound has been performed (Fig. 69(C)), then, as it is, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbol KZ1 showing the big hit. ~ KZ3 is stopped and displayed (Fig. 69(D)), and the opening effect of the jackpot game is entered (Fig. 69(E)).

In this way, when the set value is set to 5 or 6, if the set value is other than 5 or 6, the set value will be a big hit with the effect contents that appear only in the special figure variation effect related to the loss. It is suggested to be set to 5 or 6. In the following, such an effect in which the effect contents are reversed and a big hit is referred to as “success/failure reverse effect”. The success/failure inversion effect constitutes a set value effect that suggests that the set value is the relatively high setting value 5 or the setting value 6.

In the sixth embodiment, when a big hit occurs when the set value is set to 5 or 6, the success/failure reverse effect is not necessarily executed, but the success/failure reverse effect is executed with a predetermined probability. That is, when the set value is set to 5 or 6, there are times when the success/failure inversion effect is executed and a big hit occurs, and cases where the success/failure inversion effect is not executed and a big hit occurs as usual. In the sixth embodiment, the success/failure inversion effect may be executed in SP reach or L reach.

In the sixth embodiment, three types of SP reach, SP reach A to SP reach C, are set as the SP reach. Furthermore, three types of L reach, L reach A to L reach C, are set for the L reach. For each SP reach and each L reach, effect contents related to winning or losing or success or failure are set. And, basically, in the case of a jackpot, they eventually win or succeed, while in the case of a loss, they eventually lose or fail. Here, "basically" is because there is a case where the success/failure inversion effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 70, the effect content of SP reach A is a showdown between the main character who is the pitcher and the batter A of the enemy team XX. The content of the production of SP reach B is a showdown between the main character who is the pitcher and the batter B of the enemy team ΔΔ. The production content of SP reach C is a showdown between the main character who is the pitcher and the batter C of the enemy team XX.

Then, in the normal SP reach A when the SP jackpot changes, the hero character finally strikes out the batter A and wins the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B when the SP jackpot changes, the main character finally strikes out the batter B and wins the confrontation. In SP reach C when the SP jackpot changes, the main character finally strikes out batter C and wins the confrontation.

On the other hand, in the normal SP reach A in the case of SP loss variation, the main character finally hits a home run by the batter A and loses the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B in the case of SP loss variation, the main character finally hits a home run by the batter B and loses the confrontation. In SP reach C in the case of SP loss variation, the main character finally hits the home run by the batter C and loses the confrontation. Here, the "normal" SP reach A to SP reach C are because there is a case where the success/failure inversion effect is performed.

In addition, the contents of the production of L reach A are special training for the main character to learn new skills. The effect content of L reach B is a confession to the favorite woman of the main character. The content of L-reach C is a candidate for the student council president.

Then, in the normal L reach A when the SP jackpot changes, the new skill is successfully acquired. Similarly, in the normal L reach B when the SP jackpot variation, the confession is finally successful. In L reach C when the SP jackpot changes, the student council president is elected.

On the other hand, in the normal L reach A when the SP loss variation occurs, the new skill acquisition fails. Similarly, in the normal L reach B in the case of SP loss variation, the confession finally fails. In L reach C when there is a change in SP loss, the student council president is defeated. Here, the "normal" L reach A to L reach C are because there is a case where the success/failure inversion effect is performed.

In this way, the jackpot SP reach and L reach are the production contents that finally win or succeed. On the other hand, the lost SP reach and L reach are the contents of the production that will eventually be defeated or fail. Therefore, when the success/failure inversion effect is executed in the case of a big hit, the big hit is suddenly and unexpectedly notified by the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the big hit, after being finally defeated or failed.

Specifically, in the case of SP reach A, in the confrontation between the main character and batter A, a home run was finally hit by batter A, and the main character was defeated in the confrontation and disappointed. The stop display of EZ1 to EZ3 is performed (see FIG. 69). Similarly, in SP Reach B, the main character and the batter B are confronted with each other. After the home run is finally hit by the batter B and the main character is defeated by the confrontation, the jackpot production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are shown. The stop display is displayed. In SP Reach C, in the confrontation between the hero character and the batter C, the home run was finally hit by the batter C and the hero character lost the confrontation after being defeated in the confrontation. After that, the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the jackpot were displayed. Done.

Further, in the L reach A, due to the special training for new skill acquisition, after the main character fails to learn the new skill and is discouraged after failing in the special training, stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit is performed. . Similarly, in the case of L reach B, in the confession to a favorite woman, after being disappointed by the favorite woman and the main character fails to confess and is discouraged, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing a big hit are stopped. Display is performed. In L reach C, in the election of the student council president, after being defeated by the student council president and the main character fails in the election and is discouraged, a stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit is performed.

Here, the probabilities of selecting SP reach A to SP reach C and L reach A to L reach C (“selection rate” in FIG. 70) are set as shown in FIG. 70. Values of random numbers for special figure fluctuation pattern determination (special figure fluctuation pattern determination values) are appropriately assigned to various effects so that the selection ratios shown in FIG. 70 are obtained.

In the case of a big hit, the selectivity is high in the order of SP reach A>SP reach B>SP reach C. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the selectivity is high in the order of SP reach C>SP reach B>SP reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the order of SP reach A>SP reach B>SP reach C.

In the case of a big hit, the selectivity is high in the order of L reach A>L reach B>L reach C. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the selectivity is high in the order of L reach C>L reach B>L reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be a big hit in the order of L reach A>L reach B>L reach C.

Next, an example of a process for determining whether to execute the success/failure inversion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Hereinafter, this process is referred to as success/failure reverse effect determination process. As the success/failure inversion effect determination process, for example, the process shown in FIG. 71 is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 in the special figure variation effect start process of step S4306 to issue the special figure variation effect pattern command representing the special figure variation effect pattern to the effect RAM 124. It can be performed after setting in a predetermined area of.

In the success/failure reversal effect determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5301 whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the stored special figure fluctuation start command is the SP jackpot fluctuation or the L jackpot fluctuation. It is determined whether to execute the SP jackpot effect for jackpot or the L reach jackpot effect. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure variation pattern is not the SP big hit variation or the L big hit variation, the success/failure reverse effect determination processing is ended and the special figure variation effect start processing is returned to, where the special figure variation pattern is the SP big hit variation. , Or L jackpot fluctuation, the process advances to step S5302.

In step S5302, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag to determine whether the set value is set to "5" or "6". When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is not set to “5” or “6”, the success/failure reverse effect determination processing is ended and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start processing, and the set value is “5”. , Or "6", the process advances to step S5303.

In step S5303, the production control microcomputer 121 selects the success/failure reverse production determination table. The success/failure inversion effect determination table is a data table used when performing success/failure inversion effect determination for determining whether or not to execute success/failure inversion effect. As shown in FIG. 72, the success/failure reversal effect determination table is first associated with the set value. Further, the success/failure reversal effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the type of effect, specifically, the type of SP reach or the type of L reach.

Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the set value flag and special figure variation effect pattern data stored in the effect RAM 124 to confirm the set value and the kind of effect, and to confirm the set value and effect type. The success/failure reverse effect execution determination table associated with is selected.

In each success/failure reversal effect execution determination table, the value of the success/failure reversal effect determination random number (success/failure reversal effect judgment value) is distributed depending on whether or not the success/failure reversal effect is executed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 72 is obtained. ing. The success/failure reversal effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

Next, in step S5304, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the success/failure inversion effect determination random number counter as the success/failure inversion effect determination random number, and in step S5305, obtains the success/failure inversion effect determination random number in step S5305. Success/failure reverse effect determination is performed by collating with the success/failure reverse effect determination table selected in S5303. The success/failure reversal effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S5306 whether or not to execute the success/failure reverse effect as a result of the success/failure reverse effect determination. When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines not to execute the success/failure reverse effect, the success/failure reverse effect determination process is ended and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start process, while if it is determined to execute the success/failure reverse effect, the success/failure reverse effect is generated in step S5307. The success/failure reverse effect production command indicating the execution of is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, the success/failure reverse effect execution determination processing is ended, and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start processing.

When the success/failure inversion effect command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 performs L reach or SP reach. At this time, the success/failure reversal effect is executed by displaying an image related to L reach or SP reach of the effect content that is originally lost on the display unit 50a, and finally, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit. Display the stop.

According to the success/failure reversal effect determination table according to the sixth embodiment, the selection rate for execution of the success/failure reversal effect is higher in the case of the setting value “6” than in the setting value “5” for each effect type. It is set high. Therefore, when the success/failure inversion effect is executed, the set value “6” can be expected more than the set value “5”. Further, for each set value, the possibility that the success/failure inversion effect is executed is set to be high in the order of SP reach C>SP reach B>SP reach A. Similarly, there is a high possibility that the success/failure reverse effect is executed in the order of L reach C>L reach B>L reach A. These orders match the order of the probabilities that are selected in the case of losing for the same reach effect. That is, the tendency of the selection rate with respect to the execution of the success/failure inversion effect and the tendency of the expected degree of loss with respect to the same reach effect match. Therefore, while the loss of the original function of the reach effect is suppressed as much as possible, the game enjoyment is improved by the success/failure reverse effect.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, by executing the success/failure reversal effect, the jackpot is produced with a theory different from the usual theory, so that the player can be surprised and experience a fresh taste. Further, among them, the setting value is suggested, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, since the success/failure inversion effect is executed when the set values “5” and “6” which are relatively high are set, it is possible to raise the mood of the player. Further, since the success/failure inversion effect is executed at the time of a big hit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game.

(Modification of Sixth Embodiment)
The success/failure inversion effect may be executed by SP reach or L reach, but the type of effect in which the success/failure inversion effect is executed is not limited and may be appropriately set. The success/failure inversion effect may be executed only in the SP reach. Further, the success/failure inversion effect may be executed only in the L reach. Furthermore, the success/failure reversal effect may be executed in some types of SP reach or L reach such as SP reach A or L reach A, for example. Further, the success/failure inversion effect may be executed by an effect other than SP reach and L reach.

The success/failure reverse effect may be executed when the set value is “5” or “6”, but the set value at which the success/failure reverse effect is executed is not limited and may be set appropriately. For example, the success/failure inversion effect may be executed only with one specific set value such as the set value “6”. Further, the success/failure inversion effect may be executed at the highest setting value and the lowest setting value such as the setting values “6” and “1”.

Further, the specific effect contents of the success/failure inversion effect are not limited to the effect contents shown in FIG. 69, and may be appropriately set. Further, instead of executing the effect that suggests the set value with the effect contents having a story like the above-described success/failure reverse effect, for example, the light emission mode that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6” The frame lamp 53 may emit light. Similarly, the board moving device 55 may be operated in an operation mode that appears only when the setting value is “5” or “6”. Furthermore, the sound that appears only when the setting value is “5” or “6” may be output from the speaker 52. These are not limited to the special figure variation effect, and may be performed as a big hit game effect or a demonstration effect.

Furthermore, the success/failure reversal effect is performed by the special figure variation effect, and as a success/failure reversal effect, a jackpot game is performed after the effect having a function basically suggesting a loss such as defeat or failure is performed. The application scene of the success/failure inversion effect is not limited to this. For example, a so-called "rank up bonus" round game is played, and in this round game, at the branch point of whether or not the round game continues, the round game continues if the production content is success or victory, It is assumed that the round game ends when the production content is failure or defeat. Then, when the set value "5" or "6" is set, the success/failure inversion effect is executed in this scene, and although it fails or is defeated, the round game may be allowed to continue.

Also, in the jackpot game, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game if the production content is to finally succeed or win, and a high probability state is set after the jackpot game if the production content is to eventually fail or be defeated. I will not be done. And, if the setting value "5" or "6" is set, the success/failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and the content of the effect is to eventually fail or be defeated, but it is a high probability state after the jackpot game. May be set.

In addition, there are multiple types of high-probability prescribed times when the high-probability state is set in the same effect mode after the jackpot game, and in a situation where the special map variable display is continuously executed in the high-probability state, a certain high-probability regulation When the special map variable display relating to the number of times is being executed, it is assumed that an effect as to whether or not the high-probability state continues is executed as a branch point of whether or not the high-probability state continues. This effect is assumed to be a predetermined showdown or mission. And basically, if the high-probability state continues, you win in a confrontation or succeed in a mission. On the other hand, if the high probability state does not continue, you will be defeated in a confrontation or will fail in a mission. When the set value "5" or "6" is set, the success/failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, defeated in the confrontation, or failed in the mission, but the high probability state can be continued. You may do it.

Further, the success/failure reversal effect may be performed using the loss variation. For example, if it is originally, you lose the match and lose, but by winning the match and losing, you suggest that the setting value is "5" or "6". Is also good. In this case, since it can be seen that the set value is high although the game is lost, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play. In addition, in the success/failure reverse determination, the tendency of the probability of determining that the success/failure reverse effect is executed may be appropriately set. For example, the probability of determining that the success/failure inversion effect is to be executed may be set to be the same for each type of effect depending on the setting value “5” and the setting value “6”. Further, the probability of determining that the success/failure inversion effect is executed may be set to be constant regardless of the set value and the type of effect. Furthermore, for each set value, the probability of determining that the success/failure reversal effect is executed becomes higher in the order of SP reach A>SP reach B>SP reach C and in the order of L reach A>L reach B>L reach C. It may be set as follows. That is, the tendency of the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the type of the reach effect and the tendency of the probability of determining that the success/failure reverse effect is executed may be matched.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the seventh embodiment, when the number of times that the special figure variable display is continuously executed without winning the jackpot reaches a predetermined number, a set value effect that suggests a set value is executed. The predetermined number of times is set in plural, and as the predetermined number of times increases, it becomes easier to determine the set value that has been set. Note that, hereinafter, the number of times the special figure variable display is continuously executed without winning the jackpot is referred to as “the number of addictions”. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

As described above, various effect modes are set in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and various background images are displayed on the display unit 50a according to the effect modes. For example, when the normal effect mode is set, any one of the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, or the third normal background image G113 is displayed on the display unit 50a.

In the seventh embodiment, when the normal effect mode is set, a set value suggesting background image G140 may be displayed in addition to the normal background images G111 to G113. Displaying the setting value suggesting background image G140 is also referred to as “staying in the setting value suggesting zone”. The set value suggestive background image G140 is displayed when the number of addictions reaches a predetermined number. That is, when the number of addictions reaches the predetermined number, the set value suggestion zone is entered. In addition, the setting value suggestive background image G140 is displayed, in other words, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is suggested by plunging and staying in the setting value suggesting zone. In the following, displaying the setting value suggesting background image G140 and staying in the setting value suggesting zone are also referred to as executing setting value effects.

Specifically, when the number of addictions reaches 500 times, 750 times, and 1000 times, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, or the third normal background displayed at that time is displayed. The image G113 is switched to the setting value suggesting background image G140. The set value suggestive background image G140 is a background image dedicated to the set value effect, and includes the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, the third normal background image G113, and the probability variation background image G120. , And a background image for time saving G130.

The display of the set value suggestion background image G140 continues until the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the big hit, or until the big hit is won before the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. Executed. That is, if the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot or if the jackpot is won before the predetermined number of variable map display is executed, the setting value suggestion zone is exited. The predetermined number of times is set to 1 to 6 times. In the following, this predetermined number of times will be referred to as "the number of continuations".

The number of continuations is determined by the continuation number determination that determines how many continuations. The continuation number determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 using the continuation number determination table. The continuation number determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

As shown in FIG. 73, the continuation number determination table is associated with the number of addictions. That is, the continuation number determination table used for the continuation number determination differs depending on the number of times of addiction. Furthermore, the continuation number determination table associated with the number of addictions is also associated with the set value. That is, the continuation number determination table used in the continuation number determination also differs depending on the set value.

In this way, the continuation number determination table is associated with the number of addictions and the set value. Then, the selection rate of each continuous number (1 to 6) is set by the combination of the number of addictions and the set value.

According to the continuation number determination table, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected as 1 is set value “1”>set value “2”>set value “3”>set value “4”. Higher in the order of> set value “5”> set value “6”. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone when the number of addictions is 500, the set values are likely to be in this order.

Further, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected as 6 is set value “6”>set value “5”>set value “4”>set value “3”>set value “2”. >> set value “1”. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed 6 times in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 500, the set values are highly likely to be in this order.

Further, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected as 2 is the highest when the setting value is “2”, and the highest when the setting value is “5” or the setting value “6”. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed twice in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 500, the set value “2” is most likely and the set value “5” or the set value “6” is set. Least likely.

Alternatively, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected to be 4 is highest when the set value is “4”, and most likely when the set value is “1” or the set value “2”. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 500, the set value “4” is most likely, and the set value “1” or the set value “2” is set. Least likely.

Furthermore, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected to be 5 is highest when the set value is “5”, and is highest when the set value is “1” or the set value “2”. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed 5 times in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 500, the set value “5” is most likely to occur and the set value “1” or the set value “2” is set. Least likely.

When the number of addictions is 500 and the set value is “6”, the selectivity with respect to the number of continuous “1” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone when the number of addictions is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is “6”. Similarly, when the number of addictions is 500 and the set value is "1", the selection rate for the number of continuations "6" is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed 6 times in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is "1".

Further, when the number of addictions is 750 and the set value is “3” to the set value “6”, the selection rate for the continuous number “1 time” or “2 times” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed once or twice in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 750, there is no possibility that the set value is “3” to the set value “6”, and the set value “3” is set. It means that either "1" or the set value "2" is set. However, if the number of continuations is 1, the set value is more likely to be “1”, whereas if the number of continuations is 2, the set value is more likely to be “2”. ..

Further, when the number of addictions is 750 and the set value is “5” to the set value “6”, the selection rate for the number of continuous “3” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed three times in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 750, there is no possibility that the set value is “5” to the set value “6”, and the set value is “1” to This means that any of the set values “4” is set. However, in this case, the possibility that the setting value is “3” is the highest, and the possibility that the setting value is “1” is the lowest.

Further, when the number of addictions is 750, the selection rate for the number of continuations “4” is higher than 0 regardless of any of the set values “1” to “6”. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone after the number of addictions is 750, any of the set values “1” to “6” may be set. become. However, in this case, the possibility that the setting value is “4” is the highest, and the possibility that the setting value is “1” is the lowest.

Further, when the number of addictions is 750 and the set value is “1” to the set value “2”, the selection rate for the continuous number “5 times” or “6 times” is 0%. Therefore, when the special figure variable display is performed 5 or 6 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time the addiction number is 750, there is no possibility that the set value is "1" to the set value "2", and the set value " It means that any one of "3" to the set value "6" is set. However, when the number of times of continuation is 5, there is a high possibility that the setting value is “5”, and a possibility that the setting value is “3” is the lowest. On the other hand, when the number of continuations is 6, the set value is likely to be “6” and the set value is likely to be “3”.

In this way, when the number of addictions is 500 and 750, there may be a plurality of setting values for one continuous number, and the selection rate varies depending on the setting value. Will be suggested. On the other hand, when the number of addictions is 1000, since only one set value is associated with one continuous number, the set value is notified by the number of continuous times.

Specifically, when the number of addictions is 1000 and the set value “2” to the set value “6” are set, the selection rate for the continuous number “1 time” is 0%, and the set value “ When "1" is set, the selection rate for the number of continuation times "1" is 100%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone when the number of addictions is 1000, there is no possibility that the set value is “2” to the set value “6” and the set value is “1”. Is set. Similarly, when the number of addictions is 1000 and the number of continuations of the set value suggestion zone is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 times, the set value is “2” and the set value is “3”. -The set value "4", the set value "5", and the set value "6" are set.

As described above, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the continuation number determination based on the continuation number determination table, but performs the continuation number determination at the stop display of the special figure, that is, at the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. be able to. When the number of continuations is determined by the continuation number determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the set value effect at the end of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the normal background images G111 to G113 that have been displayed until then. To the setting value suggestive background image G140. After that, the set value effect is continuously executed until the special figure variable display is executed a continuous number of times without winning the jackpot. Then, the set value effect ends when the special figure variable display for the continuous number of times ends, and the set value suggestion background image G140 is switched to the normal background images G111 to G113 immediately before the execution of the set value effect.

Next, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 74(A), it is assumed that the special figure variation effect with the number of addictions of 500 is being executed. At this time, the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern of the 500th special figure variation display is a loss variation. Then, in the special figure variation effect in which the number of addictions is the 500th time, it is assumed that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 74(B).

Here, when the continuation number determination is performed and the continuation number is determined, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is finished, and the next special figure variation effect is started. When the setting value is produced, the setting value effect is started, and the first normal background image G111 is switched to the setting value suggesting background image G140.

In addition, when the special symbol holding number is "0" when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 for which the number of addictions is 500th ends, the next special symbol variable display and the special symbol variation effect are started. Without, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is continuously executed, but in response to the passage of the special symbol confirmation time from the start of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, that is, the special symbol hold When the special figure variation effect is present in the case of the presence of, the set value effect is started and the first normal background image G111 is switched to the set value suggestion background image G140.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 75(A) to 75(C), the set value effect is executed until the special figure variable display of the set value effect continuation number is executed without winning the jackpot, and the set value effect is performed. When the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 for the continuous number of times is performed, as shown in FIG. 75(D), the set value effect ends and the set value suggestion background image G140 indicates that the set value effect before execution. 1 Switch to the normal background image G111.

74 to 75 exemplify the set value effect when the number of addictions reaches 500 times, but the set value effect is similarly executed when the number of addictions reaches 750 times and 1000 times.

Next, in the seventh embodiment, an example of the set value effect process performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the set value effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 may perform the set value effect process shown in FIGS. 76 to 77 after the special figure fluctuation stop process of step S4308 when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop command is received in step S4307. it can.

In the set value effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5401 whether or not the normal effect mode is set. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the normal effect mode is not set, the setting value effect process is ended, and if it is determined that the normal effect mode is set, the process proceeds to step S5402.

In step S5402, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds “1” to the counter value of the hooking frequency counter that counts the hooking frequency. In this way, the counter value of the addiction number counter is incremented by "1" every time the special figure variation display is completed in the normal effect mode. The addiction counter is provided in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Further, the hooked number counter is cleared as the jackpot game is executed.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S5403 whether or not the number of remaining set value effects, which will be described later, is 1 or more. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of remaining set value effects is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S5416, and when it is determined that the number of remaining set value effects is not 1 or more, that is, 0, the process proceeds to step S5404.

Next, in step S5404, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the addiction counter to determine whether or not the addiction count is 500. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of addictions is not 500 times, the process proceeds to step S5406, and when it is determined that the number of addictions is 500 times, the process proceeds to step S5405 and the continuation number determination table for the number of addiction times 500. Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

In step S5406, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the addiction number counter to determine whether or not the addiction number is 750 times. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of addictions is not 750, the process proceeds to step S5408, and if it is determined that the number of addictions is 750, the process proceeds to step S5407 and the continuation number determination table for the number of 750 addictions. Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

In step S5408, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the addiction number counter to determine whether or not the addiction number is 1000 times. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of addictions is not 1000, it ends the set value effect processing, and if it is determined that the number of addictions is 1000, the process proceeds to step S5409, and the number of continuations for the number of 1000 addictions is continued. A judgment table is selected and it progresses to step S5410.

In step S5410, the effect control microcomputer 121 further checks the set value flag from the continuation number determination table for the selected addiction number of 500 times, 750 times, or 1000 times, and is associated with the set value. Select the continuation count determination table.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number for continuation number determination in step S5411, as a random number for continuation number determination, and selects the acquired random number for continuation number determination in step S5412. The continuation number is determined by collating with the continuation number determination table.

In each continuation count determination table, the value of the continuation count determination random number (continuation count determination value) is assigned to the continuation count so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 73 is obtained. Further, the continuation number determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

In step S5413, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the number of continuations, which is the result of the continuation number determination, in the set value effect remaining number counter, and in step S5414, the normal effect stage data indicating the current normal effect stage is used for effect RAM124. Is set in the predetermined area, and in step S5415, a set value effect start command indicating the effect contents of the set value effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the set value effect process ends.

The counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter indicates the number of remaining special figure variable displays for which the set value effect can be executed. As will be described later, in the set value effect, as long as the set value effect remaining number counter is 1 or more, “1” is subtracted each time the set value effect process is performed. In the following, the number of remaining special figure variation displays for which the set value effect can be executed is referred to as the "set value effect remaining number".

Further, when the set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ1. When the special figure fixing time has elapsed since the EZ3 was stopped, the current normal background images G111 to G113 are switched to the set value suggesting background image G140.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 subtracts "1" from the counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter in step S5416, and determines whether the set value effect remaining number is "0" in step S5417. To do. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value effect remaining number is not “0”, the setting value effect processing is ended as it is, and when it is determined that the set value effect remaining number is “0”, in step S5418, the normal operation is performed. Confirm the production stage data, show the normal production stage before the execution of the set value production, and set the set value production end command indicating the end of the set value production in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 to set the set value production. Finish the process.

When the set value effect end command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the set value suggestion background image G140. To the normal background images G111 to G113 before execution of the set value effect, and the set value effect is ended.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the set value effect capable of suggesting or notifying the set value is executed based on the number of times of addiction, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved and the jackpot can not be won. Even if the game declines, you can get interested in the game. Further, as the number of addictions increases, the possible set values are narrowed down, and it becomes easier to estimate the set values, so the effect of the set value effect is improved.

(Modification of Seventh Embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, the setting value effect is executed by displaying the setting value suggesting background image G140 on the display unit 50a. However, as the effect mode of the setting value effect, the type of image is the setting value suggesting background image G140. It is not limited and may be set appropriately. Further, as an effect mode of the set value effect, the set value effect may be executed by using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board moving device 55 instead of or in addition to the image. ..

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the set value is suggested or reported according to the number of times the set value effect is continued, but the element capable of suggesting or notifying is not limited to the number of times of continuation, and may be set appropriately. For example, a plurality of types of images related to the set value effect may be set, and the set value may be suggested or notified depending on the type of image that appears when the number of addictions is a predetermined number.

Further, the number of times the set value effect is executed, the number of times the setting value effect is continued, the selection rate of the number of times of continuation for each set value, and the like may be appropriately set.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the continuation number determination is executed at the start of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the set value effect starts when the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed since the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 stopped. However, the execution timing of the continuation number determination and the start timing of the set value effect may be set appropriately. For example, after the determination of the number of times of continuation is performed, the set value effect may be started when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variably displayed, and the set value suggestion zone may be entered. Further, the set value effect may be started in the middle of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 such as when the reach is established, and the set value suggestion zone may be entered.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, only the special figure variation display in the normal production mode is counted in the special figure variation display relating to the number of addictions for executing the set value production, but in the probability variation production mode and the time saving production mode. The special figure variation display at this time may be counted.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eighth embodiment, when the setting value that is most advantageous to the player is set, that is, when the setting value with the highest jackpot probability is set, that setting value is set in the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds. There is a case where a set value effect that suggests that is set is executed. The eighth embodiment will mainly describe differences from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

As described in the basic embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is provided with various types of jackpot symbols. In the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, six types of jackpot designs, namely jackpot design D to jackpot design I, are provided as jackpot designs according to special figure 2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern D is 10, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern E is 10, and the round of the jackpot game related to jackpot pattern F. The number is eight, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern G is six, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern H is four, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to jackpot pattern I is 6 times.

In the following, the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol D is "4th jackpot game", the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol E is "5 jackpot game", the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol F is "6th jackpot game", The jackpot game related to the jackpot pattern G is the “7th jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol H is the “8th jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol I is the “9th jackpot game”,

Further, the opening time of the special winning opening 14 in the round game of the fourth big hit game to the ninth big hit game is set to 29.5 seconds, and the closing time thereof is set to 2.0 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, the game state set after the fourth big hit game to the eighth big hit game is a high-probability high-base game state, and the high-probability prescribed number is 160 times, and the time saving prescribed number is 160 times. It is set. On the other hand, the game state set after the ninth jackpot game is a low-probability high-base game state, and the time saving prescribed number is set to 100 times.

Then, in the fourth jackpot game, it is suggested that the number of rounds is 10, and the jackpot game effect dedicated to the fifth jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game, a jackpot game effect called a "rank up bonus" is executed. In the rank-up bonus, for example, the number of round games, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that a player can obtain is not known before the jackpot game starts, and during the jackpot game, the round game continues to reach the maximum. The attraction of the player can be improved by performing an effect of whether or not the number of prize balls is increased (increased).

The number of rounds from the 5th jackpot game to the 9th jackpot game is 4, 6, 8 and 10 times. At the end of the 4th round, there is an effect as to whether or not the round game will continue after the 4th round. Be seen. Then, in the case of the fifth jackpot game to the seventh jackpot game, and the ninth jackpot game, in the final stage of the sixth round, an effect as to whether or not the round game continues after the sixth round is performed. In the case of the fifth jackpot game to the sixth round game, at the end of eight rounds, an effect as to whether or not the round game continues after eight rounds is performed.

For example, when the round game of the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a video in which the singer who is the favorite of the main character sings the song A as the round background image G201 on the display unit 50a. Is displayed, and the song A is played from the speaker 52. Then, when the fourth round ends, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the singer finishes singing the song A and is immersed in the afterglow. The scene immersed in this afterglow constitutes an effect of whether or not the round game continues.

Then, if it is the eighth jackpot game, the round game ends here, so as shown in FIG. 81(C), after a short time, the game enters the ending and as shown in FIG. 81(D). After suggesting that the singer has bowed and the round game has ended, the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6 are displayed as shown in FIG. 81(E). On the other hand, if the fifth big hit game to the seventh big hit game, and the ninth big hit game, the round game continues, so after a short while, the round 5 starts and as shown in FIG. 82(A). Then, the singer begins to sing another song B.

Also, from the 5th round to the 6th round, as in the case of the 1st to 4th rounds, the image in which the singer sings the song B flows, and when the 6th round ends, as shown in FIG. Finishes singing song B and immerses himself in the afterglow. And if it is the seventh jackpot game and the ninth jackpot game, the round game ends here. Therefore, as in the case of the eighth jackpot game, after a short interval, as shown in FIG. 82(C). The ending is done. On the other hand, in the case of the fifth big hit game to the sixth big hit game, the round game continues, so after a short time, the round 7 is started and, as shown in FIG. 82(D), the singer plays again. Start singing another song C.

Further, similarly from the seventh round to the eighth round, an image in which the singer sings the song C flows, and when the eighth round ends, as shown in FIG. Soak. Then, if it is the sixth jackpot game, the round game ends here, so as in the case of the eighth jackpot game and the like, after a short interval, the ending is performed as shown in FIG. 83(B). Be seen. On the other hand, in the case of the fifth jackpot game, the round game continues, so after a short while, the round 9 is started and the singer plays another song D as shown in FIG. 83(C). Start singing. After that, when the 10th round ends, the singer finishes singing the song D, and after a short time after being immersed in the afterglow, as shown in FIG. 83(D), as in the case of the eighth jackpot game and the like. The ending is executed.

As described above, in the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game, there is a case in which the singer finishes singing a song, and after a short time after being immersed in the afterglow, the singer bows and sometimes starts singing the song again. Here, the scene in which the singer finishes singing the song and soaks in the afterglow for a while, constitutes a continuous branch effect of whether or not the round game continues. In addition, the bowing scene constitutes a continuation failure production that suggests that the round game does not continue. On the other hand, the scene in which singing again constitutes a continuous success effect that suggests that the round game continues.

In addition, during the period when there is a little time between the singer singing a song and bowing, and the period when a singer finishes singing a song and starts another song, that round, Specifically, it is a period of closing after opening the special winning opening 14 in the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, and the tenth round. The time of this period is longer than the closing time of the special winning opening 14 after opening in the first round to the third round, the fifth round, the seventh round, and the ninth round.

Next, the blessing effect executed in one round of the fifth jackpot game will be described. The blessing effect is an effect that suggests that the number of rounds is the maximum in the rank-up bonus. There are three types of blessing production. The first is a normal blessing effect that can be executed with any set value. The second is a high set value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the set value is 4 to 6 and suggests that the set value is relatively high. The third is a maximum set value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the set value is 6 and suggests that the set value is the highest.

Here, specific examples of the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect will be described. First, the normal blessing production will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 84(A), in one round, a singer who likes the protagonist character appears and starts singing song A.

Here, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the first effect button operation effective period as described in the basic embodiment occurs, and the first effect button operation accompanied by the first effect button operation promotion image G12. The promotion effect is executed. When the first effect button 40k is operated during this first effect button operation effective period, any blessing effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 84(C), the normal blessing effect is composed of the movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment. Specifically, the movable board 55k descends to the operating position in front view, the rotating member 55k1 rotates, and the normal effect image G13 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a.

Further, the high set value suggestion blessing effect is also configured to include the movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but further effects are also included. Specifically, the movable plate body 55k in FIG. 84(D) descends to the operating position in front view, and the rotating member 55k1 rotates. Further, in addition to the normal effect image G13 being displayed on the entire display section 50a, the speaker 52 outputs a specific effect sound (for example, "cuinkyuin") in a system different from that of the song A. This is different from the normal blessing effect in that a specific sound effect (for example, “cuinkyuin”) is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, the highest set value suggestion blessing effect is also configured to include the movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but further effects are also included. Specifically, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and the rotating member 55k1 rotates. Further, the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display section 50a, and the specific effect sound (for example, "Qinkyuin") is output from the speaker 52 in a system different from that of the song A. It is different from the normal blessing effect in that a specific sound effect (for example, “cuinkyuin”) is output from the speaker 52 and the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Further, the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, which is different from the high set value suggestion blessing effect.

When the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the highest setting value suggesting blessing effect are not executed, the first effect button operation is performed even if the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation effective period. The background image for round G201 is displayed as it is, only when the promotion image G12 disappears.

Further, the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect are performed for 5 seconds. When these effects are completed, the movable board 55k returns to the standby state, the specific effect sound disappears, and the normal effect image G13 or the special effect image G16 returns to the round background image G201 in which the singer sings the song A.

As described above, the normal blessing effect, the high set value suggestive blessing effect, and the maximum set value suggestive blessing effect may be executed. Whether the blessing effect is executed, and which blessing effect is executed Is determined by a blessing effect determination that determines whether or not to execute the blessing effect and the type of the blessing effect when executing the blessing effect. The blessing effect determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 using the blessing effect determination table. The blessing effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

As shown in FIGS. 85(A), 85(B), 86(A), and 86(B), the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value. That is, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination differs depending on the set value. Further, the blessing effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the number of times the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan is executed. That is, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination also differs depending on the number of times the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan is executed.

In this way, the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value and the number of times the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan is executed. Then, the combination of the set value and the number of times the fifth jackpot game in the continuous change is executed sets the kind of blessing effect to be executed and the selection rate of non-execution of the blessing effect.

For example, if the setting value is "6", it is possible to select the execution of the normal blessing effect, the execution of the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, the execution of the maximum setting value suggesting reduction effect, and the non-execution of the blessing effect. Further, if the set value is "4" and the set value is "5", execution of the normal blessing effect, execution of the high set value suggestive blessing effect, and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected. Further, if the set value is "1" to the set value "3", execution of the normal blessing effect and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected.

Then, in the case of the set value “4” to the set value “6”, the selection rate for executing the high set value effect becomes higher as the number of times of execution of the fifth big hit game in the continuous change increases. Further, in the case of the set value "6", as the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan increases, the selection rate for execution of the maximum set value effect increases. Further, with respect to the number of times the fifth jackpot game is executed in the same continuous channel, the higher the set value, the higher the selection rate for executing the high set value effect.

Next, an example of the blessing effect process performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the blessing effect in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 can perform the blessing effect process shown in FIG. 87 after step S4203 in the 10 ms timer interrupt process of step S4012.

In the blessing effect process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5501 whether or not one round of the fifth jackpot game is being executed. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that one round of the fifth jackpot game is not executed, the blessing effect process is ended, and when it is determined that one round of the fifth jackpot game is executed, the process proceeds to step S5502.

In step S5502, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the first effect button operation is currently in the first effect button operation effective period and the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation effective period. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it is not in the first effect button operation effective period or is in the first effect button operation effective period but the first effect button 40k is not operated, it ends the blessing effect process. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation effective period and the first effect button operation is effective, the process proceeds to step S5503.

In step S5503, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a blessing effect determination table associated with these based on the set value indicated by the set value flag and the number of times the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan is executed.

Although not shown, the effect control microcomputer 121 is provided in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 in the opening effect start process when, for example, an opening command indicating the big hit symbol E related to the fifth big hit game is received. The fifth jackpot game execution number counter is incremented by "1". Thereby, the production control microcomputer 121 can count the number of times of execution of the fifth jackpot game in the continuous change. Further, the fifth jackpot game execution number counter is cleared when shifting from the high-probability/high-base game state or the low-probability-high base game state to the low-probability/low-base game state without going through the big jackpot.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number for blessing effect determination in step S5504 as a random number for determining the blessing effect, and in step S5505, the selected random number for the blessing effect determination is the selected blessing effect. The blessing effect determination is performed by collating with the determination table.

It should be noted that in each blessing effect determination table, the value of the random number for blessing effect determination (blessing effect) is displayed when the various blessing effects are executed or when the blessing effect is not executed so that the selection rates (%) shown in FIGS. Judgment value) is assigned. The blessing effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

In step S5506, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the result of the blessing effect determination is the execution of any blessing effect. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the blessing effect is not executed, the blessing effect is ended as it is, and when it is determined that one of the blessing effects is executed, in step S5507, the blessing effect indicating the kind and the effect content of the blessing effect. The start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the blessing effect process ends. Note that the effect control microcomputer 121 does not perform the blessing effect process after that when the process proceeds to step S5503 once in the fifth jackpot game.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, in a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is the maximum, a blessing effect that indicates that the number of rounds is the maximum is used, and a high set value that indicates that the set value is relatively high. Since the suggested blessing effect and the highest set value suggested blessing effect that suggests that the set value is the highest, the interest in the game is improved and the player's motivation for the game can be further enhanced. Furthermore, as the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in continuous chanting increases, the high setting value effect and the highest setting value effect are more likely to be executed, which further enhances the player's willingness to play.

(Modification of the eighth embodiment)
The specific effect contents of the set value effect are not limited to the eighth embodiment, and may be appropriately set. Further, although the high setting value effect and the highest setting value effect are executed using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the board moving device 55, instead of the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the board moving device 55. Alternatively, in addition to the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the movable panel device 55, another effect device such as the frame lamp 53 may be used to execute the high set value effect and the highest set value effect. Further, the type of effect device to be used may be changed between the high set value effect and the highest set value effect.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the blessing effect determination is performed based on the number of times the fifth jackpot game is executed during the consecutive chan, but the number of consecutive chan is also included including the number of times the jackpot game other than the fifth jackpot game is executed. The blessing performance determination may be made based on the above. Further, the blessing effect determination may be performed based on the number of times of execution of the jackpot game in which the number of times of execution of the round game is the maximum, without being limited to continuous chanting.

Further, only one of the high set value effect and the highest set value effect may be executable. The high set value effect can be executed with the set value “4” to the set value “6”, but may be executed with the set value “5” to the set value “6”. Further, in the case of the set value "1" to the set value "3" or the set value "1" to the set value "2", it is possible to execute a low set value effect that suggests that the set value is relatively low. You may allow it.

Further, the execution timing of the blessing effect is not limited to the eighth embodiment, and may be set appropriately. For example, the blessing effect may be executed during the round game after the second round. Further, a blessing effect may be executed at the opening. Further, in the special figure variation effect, before the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the blessing effect may be executed after being notified of the big hit. Furthermore, the execution timing of the blessing effect is not limited to one, and a plurality of execution timings may be set. Further, the blessing effect pattern is not limited to one, and a plurality of patterns may be set.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the ninth embodiment, the set value effect that suggests the set value is executed using the display mode at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. Note that the ninth embodiment will mainly describe differences from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

First, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the power is turned on, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of a predetermined combination set in advance are displayed in a stopped state on the display unit 50a. For example, as shown in FIG. 88(A), it is assumed that the combination of "left effect design EZ1, middle effect design EZ2, right effect design EZ3" is "3.2.4". Then, in this state, when the first special figure fluctuation display after the power is turned on is started, the fluctuation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started accordingly.

Here, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be appropriately set, but, for example, as a normal display mode in which the set value effect is not performed, FIGS. 88(B) to 88( As shown in C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the stopped state can be moved downward as they are. Hereinafter, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is referred to as a "normal start mode".

The order in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start to change can be set appropriately. For example, the three effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can start changing at the same time. It is also possible to start changing in the order of the left effect design EZ1→the right effect design EZ3→the middle effect design EZ2.

Then, in the ninth embodiment, when the set value is the same as the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was previously applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and has not changed, the first effect after the power is turned on. In the variable display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the normal start mode. Therefore, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started in the normal start mode, and the set value changes with the same set value that was set when the power supply voltage was previously applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Suggests that you have not. In the following, the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 last time is referred to as the “previous set value”.

On the other hand, when the set value is different from the previous set value, that is, when the set value has been changed since the last time the power supply voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the first fluctuation display after the power was turned on. In, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are different from the normal start mode, as shown in FIGS. 89(B) to 89(C), from the first stop state after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 89(A). The variable display is started in the first special start mode. Specifically, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been stopped move downward after repeatedly performing a small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the first variable display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes the "first special start mode" at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Then, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode suggests that the set value has changed from the previous time.

When the set value is higher than the previous set value, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are the first stop after the power is turned on in the first variable display after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 90(A). From the state, as shown in FIGS. 90(B) to 90(C), the variable display is started in the second special start mode different from the normal start mode and the first special start mode. Specifically, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been stopped move downward after repeatedly performing small reciprocating motions in the left-right direction and the vertical direction at the start of the first variable display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes the "second special start mode" at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Therefore, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode suggests that the set value becomes higher than the previously set value and has changed from the previous time.

Note that the order in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 move downward when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 perform variable display in the first special start mode or the second special start mode can also be set appropriately.

In this way, since the display mode at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on is set in plural types based on the current set value and the previous set value, the player can: It is possible to roughly understand the relationship between the current set value and the previous set value.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the set value is higher than the previous set value, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the second special start mode and the variable display in the second special start mode. There is a time to start in the first special start mode without starting. The probability that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the second special start mode becomes higher as the current set value becomes higher.

In the following, the normal start mode, the first special start mode, and the second special start mode are collectively referred to as the “effect symbol variation start mode”. Further, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode is referred to as "first set value effect". In addition, starting variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode is referred to as "second set value effect". The first setting value effect and the second setting value effect are collectively referred to as "setting value effect".

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first set value effect and the second set value effect are not executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Therefore, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is started in the same manner regardless of whether or not the set value is the same as the previously set value.

Next, an example of processing for determining whether or not to execute the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Hereinafter, this process is referred to as a set value effect determination process. As the setting value effect determination processing, for example, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the effect shown in FIG. 91 in the effect RAM 124 for effecting a special figure variation effect pattern command representing a special figure variation effect pattern in the special figure variation effect start processing of step S4306. It can be performed after setting in a predetermined area of.

As a premise of the set value effect determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 has previously supplied the power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 based on backup data in addition to the set value designation command in the game control main process. It is assumed that the previous set value designation command indicating the set value set at that time is transmitted to the effect control board 120. When the production control microcomputer 121 receives the previous set value designation command, the previous set value data indicating the set value indicated by the previous set value designation command is stored in the previous set value data area provided in the production RAM 124. It should be remembered.

In the setting value effect determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5601 whether or not the special figure change effect to be started is the first special figure change effect after the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the special figure variation effect executed flag is ON.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it is not the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on, that is, the special figure variation effect executed flag is ON, it ends the setting value effect determination process and starts the special figure variation effect. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it is the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on, that is, if the special figure variation effect executed flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S5602.

In step S5602, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a special figure variation effect execution flag indicating that the first special figure variation effect has been executed after the power is turned on in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and proceeds to step S5603.

In step S5603, the production control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag and the previous set value data, and determines whether the current set value is the same as the previous set value. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is the same as the previous set value, the production control microcomputer 121 ends the set value production determination process and returns to the special figure variation production start process. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current setting value is not the same as the previous setting value, the process proceeds to step S5604.

Next, in step S5604, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag and the previous set value data to determine whether the current set value is higher than the previous set value. If the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the current setting value is not higher than the previous setting value, the process proceeds to step S5610, whereas if it is determined that the current setting value is higher than the previous setting value, the process proceeds to step S5605.

In step S5605, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the second set value effect determination table. The second setting value effect determination table is a data table used when performing the second setting value effect determination for determining whether or not to execute the second setting value effect. As shown in FIG. 92, the second set value effect determination table is associated with the set value. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the second set value effect determination table associated with the set value by referring to the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124.

In each of the second set value effect determination tables, the value of the second set value effect determination random number (the second set value is set) indicating whether or not the second set value effect can be executed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. Performance determination value) is distributed. As shown in FIG. 92, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that it is determined to execute the second set value effect. The second set value effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123. Further, when the set value is "1", it is unlikely that the set value is higher than the set value last time, and thus the selection rate for execution of the second set value effect is 0%.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the second setting value effect determination random number counter as the second setting value effect determination random number in step S5606, and in step S5607 the acquired second setting value effect. The second setting value effect determination is performed by collating the determination random number with the second setting value effect determination table selected in step S5605. The second set value effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S5608 whether or not to execute the second set value effect, as a result of the second set value effect determination. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines not to execute the second set value effect, the process proceeds to step S5610, whereas if it is determined to execute the second set value effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5609.

In step S5609, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the second set value effect start command indicating the effect content of the second set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, completes the set value effect determination processing, and ends the special drawing. The process returns to the variation effect start process. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the first set value effect start command indicating the effect content of the first set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 in step S5610, and ends the set value effect determination processing. The process returns to the special figure variation effect start process.

When the second set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 operates after the power is turned on. The second set value effect is executed at the start of the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode.

When the first set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 turns on the power. The first set value effect is executed at the beginning of the subsequent variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode.

If the set value and the previous set value are the same, the first set value effect command or the second set value effect command is not transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on in the normal start mode.

In this way, the set value effect may be executed, so that the player can recognize how the current set value is compared with the previous set value. That is, it is possible to infer whether or not the set value has been changed since the power supply voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 last time. Basically, the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is cut off at the end of business at the gaming shop, and the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on before the next day's business starts. Therefore, the set value of the previous day and the set value of the day can be compared depending on whether or not the set value effect is executed. Then, since it is possible to know the information regarding the set value depending on whether or not the set value effect is executed, the player is made to pay attention when starting the variable display of the first effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on, and the effect symbol EZ1 to The effect of the variable display of EZ3 can be improved.

Furthermore, there are two types of setting value effects, the first setting value effect and the second setting value effect, which have different functions and suggest different information regarding the setting value, so that the game is further played. It is possible to improve the effect of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 by paying attention to the person at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on.

(Modification of the ninth embodiment)
The effect modes of the first set value effect and the second set value effect, that is, the first special start mode and the second special start mode are not limited to the ninth embodiment and may be appropriately set. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be variably displayed in a mode different from the first special start mode and the second special start mode. Further, not at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, using the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 when the reach is established or stopped, the set value effect that provides information about the set value. May be executed.

Further, the set value effect may be displayed in a variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 other than the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. For example, after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, for example, the set value effect may be executed using the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 a predetermined number of times such as the first 10 times after the power is turned on. The number of times may be set to one or more. Further, after turning on the power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the set value effect may be executed using the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a predetermined period after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, the set value effect may be executed based on the change amount of the set value from the set value of the previous day. For example, in the case of executing the first set value effect, as the change amount from the previous day set value increases, the width of movement in the left-right direction is increased, the moving speed is increased, or the number of movements is increased. The first set value effect may be executed. When performing the second set value effect, as the change amount from the previous day set value increases, the moving width of at least one of the left and right direction and the vertical direction is increased, the moving speed is increased, or the number of times of movement is increased. The second set value effect may be executed in association with the change amount, such as by increasing the number.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the set value effect is executed using the image display device 50, but in addition to the image display device 50 or in place of the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and The setting value effect may be executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the panel movable device 55. Only one of the first set value effect and the second set value effect or only one of the effect devices other than the image display device 50 may be used. Furthermore, when both the first set value effect and the second set value effect are executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50, the effect mode of the effect device other than the image display device 50 is the first set value effect. And the second set value effect may be the same or different.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first setting value effect and the second setting value effect are executed using the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but instead of this, it is executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. May be. Alternatively, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be used to execute the first set value effect and the second set value effect. Further, one of the first set value effect and the second set value effect is executed by using one of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbol KZ1 to KZ3, and the effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbol KZ1. Either one of the first set value effect and the second set value effect may be executed by using the other one of KZ3.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the tenth embodiment, a small hit that is not provided in the basic embodiment is provided. The small hit is one of the judgment results of the big hit judgment. That is, in the jackpot determination, one of the jackpot, the jackpot, and the miss is selected. Then, as a result, the probability of loss differs depending on the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency of occurrence of the loss. It should be noted that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

First, a jackpot determination table used in jackpot determination will be described. The jackpot determination table of the tenth embodiment is different from the jackpot determination table shown in the basic embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 93(A) to 93(C) and FIGS. 94(A) to 94(C), the jackpot determination table of the tenth embodiment is associated with the set value.

Further, the jackpot determination table associated with the set value is also associated with the type of the starting opening in which the winning due to the jackpot determination is performed, that is, the type of the special figure which is the target of the variable display performed based on the jackpot determination. ing. In the following, the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 1 is referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”, and the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 2 is referred to as a “second jackpot determination table”.

Further, the first jackpot determination table and the second jackpot determination table are also associated with the gaming state. That is, each of the first jackpot determination tables includes a first jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a first jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. On the other hand, each of the second jackpot determination tables includes a second jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a second jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

Then, in each jackpot determination table, a special symbol random number determination value is appropriately assigned to the jackpot, the jackpot, and the loss as the jackpot determination result. Details of the selection rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss in the big hit determination table will be described later.

The game state set after the big hit game in the tenth embodiment is also different from that in the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A is a high-probability/high-base gaming state, in which the high-probability prescribed number is 160 and the time saving prescribed number is 160. Has been set to times. Further, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B is a high-probability low base gaming state, and the high-probability prescribed number of times at this time is 160 times. On the other hand, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C is a low probability low base gaming state. That is, when the big hit symbol C is won, the big hit game is not executed and the game state is not advantageous to the player.

The jackpot pattern D and the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol E are high-probability/high-base game states, in which the high-probability prescribed number is set to 160 times, and the time saving prescribed number is set to 160 times. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is a low-probability-high-base gaming state, and the time saving prescribed number at this time is 100 times.

Further, the effect mode set after the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment is also partially different from that in the basic embodiment. A little different from the case of the basic embodiment, when the high-probability low base game state, or the low-probability low base game state is set after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol C. The latency mode is set so that it is difficult to determine whether the high probability low base game state or the low probability low base game state is set.

Latent mode is the longest, high probability low base until the special state variable display of the high probability specified number of jackpot pattern B is executed without winning the jackpot after the game state is set, or low probability low base It is continued until the special state variable display of the high probability specified number of times related to the jackpot symbol B is executed without winning the jackpot after the game state is set.

Further, the special figure variation pattern determination table is different from that of the basic embodiment due to the provision of the small hit. The special figure fluctuation pattern relating to the small hit can be set as appropriate, but for example, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, in the case of the small hit, the special figure fluctuation pattern similar to the case of the loss can be selected. When the small hit is won, the reach determination is performed as in the case of losing, and the special figure variation pattern determination table is distinguished by the presence or absence of the reach.

Specifically, as a special figure variation pattern determination table for small hits, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for small hits with reach relating to non-time saving state, a special figure 1 for reachless small hits relating to non-time saving state Fluctuating pattern determination table, special figure 2 for small hits related to time-saving game state, variation pattern determination table, special figure 2 for small hits with reach related to non-time saving state, fluctuation pattern judgment table without reach related to non-time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for use, and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for small hits related to a time saving game state.

Further, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the small hit with reach relating to the non-time saving state, the special figure 1 variation for the small hit without reach used when the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is 0 to 2. There are a pattern determination table and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a small hit without reach used when the number of reserved special figures 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. Similarly, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the small hit with reach related to the non-time saving state, the special figure 2 for the small hit without reach which is used when the special figure 2 holding number (U2) is 0 to 2 There are a fluctuation pattern determination table and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for reachless small hits used when the number of reserved special figures 2 (U2) is 3 to 4.

If you win the small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time saving state and it is judged that there is reach, SP loss variation, L loss variation, and N loss variation and special figure variation time, and the same production flow, SP small Any one of the hit variation, the L small hit variation, and the N small hit variation is selected.

In addition, if you win the small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time saving state and it is determined that there is no reach, it is normal A loss variation, normal B loss variation, and normal C loss variation and special figure variation time, and production flow. Is the same, one of the normal A small hit change, the normal B small hit change, and the normal C small hit change is selected.

Also, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state, the shortened B small hit variation having the same shortened B loss variation and special figure variation time and the same production flow is selected regardless of the presence or absence of the reach. This is because, as will be described later, the odds of winning in the special drawing 2 lottery are much lower than the loss.

Then, when the small hit is won, finally, the special display showing the small hit is stopped and displayed in the special map variable display. A small hit game is played when the fixed time starts after the special figure is stopped in a mode showing a small hit. In addition, the special figure stopped in the mode showing the small hit is the small hit symbol, and its role corresponds to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol. Next, the small hit game will be described. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, only one kind of the small hit symbol is provided, but a plurality of kinds may be set.

The small hit game is an open game that involves opening and closing the special winning opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game, and the final open game. The ending (also referred to as ED) from the end to the end of the small hit game is included. Each open game is started by the end of the opening or the end of the previous open game, and is ended by the start of the next open game or the start of the ending. Note that OP and ED can be omitted.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the tenth embodiment controls the small hit game using the small hit game control table. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, only one kind of small hit game is provided, but a plurality of kinds may be set in association with a plurality of kinds of small hit symbols.

As shown in FIG. 98, the small hit game control table stores elements (small hit game constituent elements) that make up the small hit game. The small hitting game components include the number of open games, the type of big winning opening and the opening time (opening pattern) in which each open game is played, the time to close until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time) ), and the ending time (ending time). When there are a plurality of types of small hit games, it is possible to set a small hit game constituent element for each type of small hit games.

In the small hit game of the tenth embodiment shown in FIG. 98, an open game is played twice. Then, in each opening game, the special winning opening 14 is opened for 0.2 seconds. The closing time of the special winning opening 14 between each open game is 2.0 seconds. Also, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game. Furthermore, from the end of the last open game to the end of the small hit game, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 0.5 seconds.

Next, the points that are different from the basic embodiment in the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 due to the provision of the small hits will be described. As the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the tenth embodiment, mainly, special operation processing, special figure 1 determination processing, special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing, special figure 2 determination processing, special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing, And the special symbol determination process is different from the basic embodiment. First, the special operation process will be described.

In the special operation process, a small hit game control process is included. The small hit game control process is associated with the special operation status "6", and is performed as step S1507 when the special operation status "6" is set. The "special operation status" is initially set to "1". The process of setting the special operation status to "6" will be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a small hit game control process to perform a small hit game according to the above-mentioned small hit game control table. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 101, in the small hit game control processing, when all the open games in the small hit game are finished and the ending is started, the ending corresponding to the small hit symbol related to the small hit game is shown. The ending command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "1" when the small hit game ends in the small hit game control process.

Next, the special figure 1 determination process will be described. In the special figure 1 determination process, the special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit 105a is read out first, and the jackpot determination table according to the current set value and game state is read. Based on this, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

As described above, since the jackpot determination table is associated with the setting value, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the first jackpot determination table associated with the currently set setting value. Furthermore, since the first jackpot determination table is also associated with the game state, the game control microcomputer 101, the first jackpot determination associated with the normal probability state in the first jackpot determination table associated with the setting value. Select the table or the first jackpot determination table associated with the high probability state. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot determination by collating the special symbol random number with the selected first jackpot determination table.

Here, the game control microcomputer 101, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, further reads the jackpot symbol random number and performs the jackpot symbol type determination (jackpot symbol type determination) based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. .. Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the symbol designating command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is “miss”, the lost symbol data indicating the loss is set in the special figure buffer, and the symbol designating command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer. Alternatively, if the result of the jackpot determination is “small hit”, the small hit symbol data indicating the small hit is set in the special figure buffer, and the symbol designating command indicating the small hit is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a Toku-zu 1 variation pattern determination process in the tenth embodiment. Step S1651 to step S1654, step S1658 to step S1661, and step S1664 to step S1667 of FIG. 100 are the same as step S1651 to step S1654, step S1655 to step S1658, and step S1659 to step S1662 of the basic embodiment. is there. The points of the tenth embodiment that differ from the basic embodiment of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be described below.

In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process of the tenth embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1654 that the jackpot determination result is not a “jackpot” (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655 and the jackpot determination result. Is a "small hit". When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1655 that the big hit determination result is not "small hit" (NO in S1655), the process proceeds to step S1658, and the reach determination related to the loss is performed.

On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1655 that the jackpot determination result is “small hit” (YES in S1655), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1656, and similarly to the case of the reach determination related to the loss, hits the small hit. Perform such a reach determination. The same reach determination table is used for the reach determination related to the small hit and the reach determination related to the loss.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1657 whether or not the reach determination result is "reach present". When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is not “reach” (NO in S1657), the process proceeds to step S1662, and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reachless small hit is selected, and then step Proceeds to S1665. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is “reach present” (YES in S1657), the process proceeds to step S1663 and selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for reach small hit. To Step S1665.

After proceeding to step S1665, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the same processing as that of the basic embodiment.

In addition, in the special figure 2 determination process, the table used in the jackpot determination is basically the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table, basically. Is a process similar to the special figure 1 determination process, and a description thereof will be omitted. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is basically the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Therefore, the description is omitted.

Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 101 is a special symbol determination process in the tenth embodiment. Steps S1751 to S1761 and step S1765 of FIG. 100 are the same as steps S1751 to S1761 and step S1762 of the basic embodiment. The points different from the basic embodiment of the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment will be described below.

In the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the big hit symbol has stopped (NO in S1758), the process proceeds to step S1762, and whether or not the small hit symbol has stopped. To judge. When the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the small hit symbol is not stopped in step S1762 (NO in S1762), the process proceeds to step S1765, the special operation status is changed to "1", and the special symbol determination process ends. ..

On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 that the small hit symbol has stopped (YES in S1762), the process advances to step S1763 to perform the small hit game preparation process, and in step S1764 the special operation status is "6". To end the special symbol determination process.

The game control microcomputer 101 sets the small hit game control table in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the small hit game preparation process. Also, a small hit opening flag indicating that the small hit game is being opened is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the opening time of the small hit game (the first open game is started after the small hit game is started). Up to) is set in the special operation timer. Furthermore, the opening command indicating the opening of the small hit is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

Next, the jackpot, small hit, and loss selection rates in the jackpot determination table will be described. As described above, in the jackpot determination table, special symbol determination values are appropriately allocated to the jackpot, the small hit, and the loss, which are the jackpot determination results. As a result, the selection ratios of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss in each big hit determination table are as shown in FIG. In the following, the jackpot selection rate is referred to as "big hit probability", the small hit selection rate is referred to as "small hit probability", and the loss selectivity is referred to as "miss probability".

As shown in FIG. 102, the jackpot probability does not vary depending on the type of special drawing related to jackpot determination in the same game state in each set value. However, at each set value, the jackpot probability differs between the normal probability state and the high-probability state even for the same type of special figure. Specifically, the jackpot probability is set to be higher in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state, regardless of the set value. Then, in any of the jackpot probability states, the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases.

Further, the small hit probability does not differ depending on the game state as long as the set special values are the same kind of special figure. However, at each set value, the small hit probability varies depending on the type of special figure related to the big hit determination even if the same special figure type. Specifically, the small hit probability is set to be higher in the special figure 1 than in the special figure 2 regardless of any set value. And, regardless of the set value, the small hit probability is set to be almost the same for each type of special figure.

Furthermore, each set value differs depending on the game state. Then, the loss probability of the special figure 1 becomes lower as the set value becomes higher in any gaming state. In addition, the loss probability of the special figure 1 is higher in the normal probability state than in the high probability state at any set value. That is, the high probability state is less likely to be lost. Further, the degree of the probability of losing is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. On the other hand, the loss probability of special figure 2 is substantially the same in the normal probability state and the high probability state. And the loss probability of special figure 2 is substantially the same regardless of the set value in any gaming state.

In addition, at any set value, the loss selectivity shows the relationship of special figure 2 of normal probability state/high probability state>special figure 1 of normal probability state>special figure 1 of high probability state.

Here, with regard to Toku-zu 1, the loss probability in the high probability state has a great difference depending on the set value. On the other hand, regarding the special figure 1, the loss probability in the normal probability state is higher than that in the high probability state at any setting value, but the difference between the setting values of the loss probability is smaller than the high probability state. Further, the loss probability in the special figure 2 is higher than the loss probability in the special figure 1 regardless of any set value. However, the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the normal probability state according to the special figure 2 and the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the high probability state according to the special figure 2 are It is overwhelmingly smaller than the difference due to the set value of the loss probability.

Therefore, basically, in the high base game state in which the entire game progresses by winning the game ball in the second starting opening 12 and performing the variable display of the special figure 2, the set value is estimated by the frequency of occurrence of the loss. Difficult to do. On the other hand, in the low base game state in which the entire game progresses by winning the game ball into the first starting opening 11 and performing the variable display of the special figure 1, inferring the set value based on the occurrence frequency of the loss is high base. It is easier than in the gaming state. Even in the low base game state, the difference in setting probability of the loss probability is larger in the high probability state, so that it is easier to estimate the setting value by the occurrence frequency of the loss.

In this way, the setting value is suggested based on the frequency of occurrence of the game-unwanted game, so that the game-player can be focused on the game-game. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's tiredness of playing the game and to improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the accuracy of suggesting the set value differs depending on the game state, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and improve the overall game. In particular, in the low base game state where it is relatively difficult to execute special map variable display, the accuracy of suggesting the set value based on the frequency of occurrence of the loss is higher, so it is possible to effectively prevent getting bored with the game. You can Further, in the high base game state in which the special figure variable display is relatively easy to be executed, the precision with respect to the suggestion of the set value based on the occurrence frequency of the loss is lower, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in each setting value, the probability of losing according to Toku-zu 1 is different between the normal probability state and the high-probability state, so after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol B or the jackpot symbol C is performed. When the game is being played in the same latent mode, the game state can be estimated by the frequency of occurrence of the loss. This improves the enjoyment of the game.

(Modification of the tenth embodiment)
Specific values of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability are not limited to those in the tenth embodiment, and may be set appropriately. Further, the magnitude relationship of the loss probability at each set value is not limited to that in the tenth embodiment, and may be set appropriately. For example, in each set value, the probability of loss may be set to be higher in the order of high probability state of special figure 1>normal probability state of special figure 1>normal probability state/high probability state of special figure 2. ..

Further, the magnitude relationship of the degree of difference due to the set value of the loss probability is not limited to that in the tenth embodiment, and may be set appropriately. For example, the normal probability state of special figure 1> the high probability state of special figure 1> the normal probability state/high probability state of special figure 2 are set so that the degree of difference due to the set value of the probability of loss increases. May be.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eleventh embodiment, the setting value can be set randomly. It should be noted that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment, a set value setting method changeover switch 74 for randomly setting the set value is provided. The set value setting method changeover switch 74 is composed of a slide switch having five contacts, and is provided near the set value switch 71 as shown in FIG.

The setting value setting method changeover switch 74 does not randomly set the setting value “random setting OFF”, the setting value is set randomly “random setting A”, “random setting B”, “random setting C”, and “random”. It is possible to switch to any one of "Setting D". Specifically, the knob 74k that constitutes the operation portion of the set value setting method changeover switch 74 can be slid in 5 steps, and the "random setting OFF" and "random setting" can be performed by sliding the knob 74k. It can be switched to any one of "A", "random setting B", "random setting C", and "random setting D".

The details of "random setting A", "random setting B", "random setting C", and "random setting D" will be described later, but "random setting A", "random setting B", and "random setting C" And the "random setting D" have different selection rates of set values. In the following, “random setting OFF”, “random setting A”, “random setting B”, “random setting C”, and “random setting D” are methods of setting set values. "Value setting method".

Further, the set value setting method changeover switch 74 is connected to a set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a capable of detecting a slide operation of the knob 74k, that is, a changeover operation of the set value setting method. As shown in FIG. 104, the set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a is connected to the game control board 100.

When the knob 74k is slid, the set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a detects the position of the knob 74k and outputs a detection signal indicating the position to the game control board 100. The position of the knob 74k is associated with each setting value setting method. Therefore, the detection signal indicating the position of the knob 74k substantially indicates the selected setting value setting method.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the special symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number, the set value random number is provided. The setting value random number is a random number (determination information) used in the determination of the setting value setting method described later. The game RAM 104 is provided with a set value random number counter that indicates a set value random number.

The game control microcomputer 101 updates the counter value of the set value random number counter by adding 1 in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process of step S12. When the counter value of the set value random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The range of the set value random number can be set as appropriate, but is set to 0 to 65535 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, the initial value of the set value random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101, in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process of step S103, similarly to the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information, the setting is performed. The value of the random number counter is incremented by 1 and updated. It is performed in both the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process and the other period (the period after the end of the game control side timer interrupt process until the next game control side timer interrupt process is started) .. Note that the process of adding 1 to the counter value of the set value random number counter and updating it may be performed in only one of step S12 and step S103.

Next, the setting value setting process of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 shows the setting value setting process in the eleventh embodiment. Step S51, step S53 to step S56, and step S63 of FIG. 105 are the same as step S51, step S52 to step S55, and step S56 of the basic embodiment.

In the set value setting process of the eleventh embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the set value on the set value display 87 in step S51, and then in step S52, uses the set value setting method changeover switch 74 to set the set value. It is determined whether or not "random setting OFF" is selected. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that "random setting OFF" is selected, the process proceeds to step S53, and if it is determined that "random setting OFF" is not selected, the process proceeds to step S57. The processing when the process proceeds to step S53 is the same as steps S52 to S56 in the basic embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S57, the game control microcomputer 101 is associated with the set value setting method selected by the set value setting method changeover switch 74, specifically, any one of the selected random setting A to random setting D. Selected setting value determination table. Here, the set value determination table will be described.

The setting value determination table is a data table used in setting value determination for determining setting values. As the setting value determination table, a setting value determination table (first setting value determination table) used when the random setting A is selected and a setting value determination table (first setting value determination table) used when the random setting B is selected. 2 setting value determination table), a setting value determination table used when the random setting C is selected (third setting value determination table), and a setting value determination table used when the random setting D is selected ( There is a fourth set value determination table). In other words, the set value determination table is associated with the set value setting method. Note that these set value determination tables are stored in the game ROM 103.

Each set value determination table is configured such that each set value is selected at a predetermined selection rate. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 106, in each set value determination table, a set value random number determination value (set value random number determination value) is appropriately allocated to each set value at the selectivity shown in FIG. 106. Has been. The setting value determination table is configured such that the probability of each setting value being selected differs depending on the setting value setting method (that is, random setting A to random setting D).

In the first set value determination table, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for that set value. The selectivity for the set value "6" is set to "0". That is, when the random setting A is selected, the setting value “6” is not selected. On the other hand, in the fourth set value determination table, the higher the set value, the higher the selection rate for that set value. The selectivity for the set value "1" is set to "0". That is, when the random setting D is selected, the setting value "1" is not selected.

Further, in the second setting value determination table and the third setting value determination table, the selection rates for the setting value “1” and the setting value “2” are the same, and the selection values for the setting value “3” and the setting value “4” are selected. The rates are the same, and the selection rates for the set value “5” and the set value “6” are the same. Then, in the case of the second set value determination table, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for that set value. On the other hand, in the case of the third set value determination table, the higher the set value, the higher the selection rate for that set value.

Note that, unlike the cases of the first set value determination table and the fourth set value determination table, any of the set values can be selected in the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table. .. In addition, the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table are configured such that the difference in the selection ratio depending on the set value is smaller than that in the first set value determination table and the fourth set value determination table. There is.

The description is returned to the setting value setting process. After selecting the set value determination table in step S57, the game control microcomputer 101 loads the counter value of the set value random number counter backed up in the game RAM 104 as backup data in step S58 to set the set value random number. In step S59, the set value random number indicated by the counter value is collated with the set value determination table selected in step S57 to determine the set value.

Subsequently, in step S60, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the set value data indicating the set value determined by the set value determination in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 to set a new set value, In step S61, the set value is displayed on the set value display 87, and in step S62, it is determined whether or not there is an operation for confirming the set value. The game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the same processing until it is determined that there is a setting value confirmation operation. Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is an operation for confirming the set value, the process proceeds to step S63, and the set value designation command indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 to produce the effect. It is transmitted to the control board 120.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment, the setting value can be set at random, so that the clerk of the gaming shop operates the setting value switch 71 for many pachinko gaming machines PY1 to set the setting value. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the set value while reducing the labor for changing the value. Further, since it is possible to arbitrarily set the setting value by selecting the random setting OFF with the setting value setting method changeover switch 74, the functionality of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is improved. Further, since a plurality of setting value setting methods for randomly setting the setting values are provided, it is possible to further reduce the deviation of the setting values.

(Modification of the eleventh embodiment)
In the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set randomly, but the mechanism and processing for that purpose are not limited to the eleventh embodiment, and may be set appropriately. For example, the set value setting method changeover switch 74 is configured by a slide switch, but a switch may be used if it is composed of another mechanism such as a rotary switch or a DIP switch.

Further, the type of the setting value setting method for randomly setting the setting value and the selection rate of the setting value in each setting value determination table may be set appropriately. Furthermore, the setting value may be set randomly by a method different from the setting value determination.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the twelfth embodiment, the out-ball is detected as in the first embodiment. In addition, a small hit may be won in the big hit determination according to Toku-zu 2, and a small hit game may be executed. Then, once after winning the big jackpot, until the normal gaming state is set, the number of gaming balls paid out in the big jackpot game and the small jackpot game, and after the normal gaming state is set, occurs Based on the number of out balls to be set, a setting effect that suggests a set value is executed. It should be noted that the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

First, a jackpot determination table used in jackpot determination will be described. The jackpot determination table of the twelfth embodiment is associated with set values as shown in FIGS. 107(A) to 107(C) and FIGS. 108(A) to 108(C).

Further, the jackpot determination table associated with the set value is also associated with the type of the starting opening in which the winning due to the jackpot determination is performed, that is, the type of the special figure which is the target of the variable display performed based on the jackpot determination. ing. In the following, the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 1 is referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”, and the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 2 is referred to as a “second jackpot determination table”.

Further, the first jackpot determination table and the second jackpot determination table are also associated with the gaming state. That is, each of the first jackpot determination tables includes a first jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a first jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. On the other hand, each of the second jackpot determination tables includes a second jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a second jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

Then, in the first jackpot determination table, the special symbol random number determination value is appropriately allocated to the jackpot and the loss as the jackpot determination result. That is, the big hit determination according to Toku-zu 1 does not win the small hit. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination table, the special symbol random number determination value is appropriately allocated to the jackpot and the loss as the jackpot determination result. That is, in the jackpot determination according to Toku-zu 2, a small hit may be won. The winning probability of the small hit is set to be the same regardless of the set value and the game state.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, there is only one type of small hit symbol, and one type of small hit game is provided. As shown in FIG. 109(A), in the small hit game, the open game is played twice. Then, in the opening game, the special winning opening 14 is opened for 0.9 seconds. The closing time of the special winning opening 14 between each open game is 2.0 seconds. Also, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game. Furthermore, from the end of the last open game to the end of the small hit game, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is held for 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, the game state set after the jackpot game in the twelfth embodiment is also different from that in the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109(B), the gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol D, and the jackpot symbol E is a high-probability low base gaming state. The ending condition of this gaming state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "160 times". On the other hand, the jackpot pattern C, and the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is a low-probability-high-base gaming state. The ending condition of this game state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display “100 times”.

In addition, as the production mode which is set after the jackpot game, the probability variation production mode is set in the high probability low base gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol D, and the jackpot symbol symbol E, and the jackpot. In the low probability high base game state after the big hit game related to the symbol C and the big hit symbol F, the time saving effect mode is set.

Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is the same as that of the basic embodiment. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different from the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110, the special figure variation pattern determination table is also different from that of the basic embodiment because a small hit is provided. Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, low probability low base gaming state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, high probability low base gaming state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, and low probability high base gaming state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table.

Furthermore, the winning probability related to the hit determination, the universal figure variation time, and the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D related to the auxiliary game are also different from the basic embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111A, in the non-time saving state, a win is won with a probability of 65533/65535. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the winning is won with a probability of 65534/65535. Further, as shown in FIG. 111(B), the universal figure fluctuation time in the non-time saving state is 1.1 seconds. On the other hand, the universal figure fluctuation time in the time saving state is 1.0 second. Further, as shown in FIG. 111(C), the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D relating to the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is one opening of 1.0 second. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D related to the auxiliary game in the time saving state is two times of 2.5 seconds with an interval of 1.0 second (closed).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the non-time saving state is a game state close to the time saving state with respect to the opening of the electric chew 23D. Therefore, even in the non-time saving state, it is possible to execute a game in which the right-handed stroke is performed and the special-choice 2 lottery is performed by aiming at the electric Chu 23D. However, as shown in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, in the low probability low base game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is set to be very long. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the twelfth embodiment basically performs left-handing in a low-probability low-base gaming state, and performs right-handing in a high-probability low-base gaming state and a low-probability high-base gaming state. It is sex.

Next, the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. In the twelfth embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, an out sensor 19a for detecting an out ball is provided. Then, when the out sensor 19a detects an out ball, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an out designation command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the sensor detection process (S19) (S226, see FIG. 49), and effect control. Transmit to the substrate 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 101, in the special winning opening award ball processing of the sensor detection process (S224), a special winning opening winning command indicating that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 14 in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

In addition to the sensor detection processing, special operation processing, special figure 2 determination processing, special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing, and special symbol determination processing are different from the basic embodiment. However, since the special operation process, the special figure 2 determination process, and the special symbol determination process are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is performed based on the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. As described above, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the low probability low base gaming state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the high probability low base gaming state, and the low probability There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the high base game state. Therefore, in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the game state and selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the game state.

Next, in each special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the game state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the small hit, and the special figure for loss Since there is a 2 variation pattern determination table, the game control microcomputer 101 further selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the jackpot determination result. When the jackpot determination result is a loss, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the reach determination and selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the reach determination result. Further, if the result of the reach determination is “no reach”, the special figure 2 pending number is confirmed, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the special figure 2 pending number is selected.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 variation pattern determination based on the finally selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table as in the case of the basic embodiment, and determines the special figure 2 variation pattern. The corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, the special figure fluctuation time is set in the special operation timer, and the fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started.

Next, the set value effect will be described. The production control microcomputer 121 wins the big hit in the big hit determination in the normal game state, and when the big hit game is executed, next, until the normal game state which is advantageous to the player is set, the big hit game, And, the number of game balls paid out by winning in the big winning opening 14 in the small hitting game, that is, the number of requests obtained by the player (hereinafter, referred to as “specific winning number”) is counted. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets when the normal game state is set and the number of outs (hereinafter, referred to as “specific out number”) generated after exiting the game state advantageous to the player reaches the specific acquisition number. A set value effect that suggests the set value being set is executed. In the following, the fact that the number of specific outs reaches the number of specific acquisitions is referred to as "establishment of a set value effect condition".

Here, a specific example from when the jackpot game is played to when the set value effect is executed will be described. For example, it is assumed that the jackpot is won when the normal game mode is set and the normal effect mode is set, and the jackpot game is started and the opening effect is executed as shown in FIG. 112(A). Then, when the jackpot game progresses to reach the ending, the ending effect is performed as shown in FIG. 112(B). Similar to the basic embodiment, in the ending effect, the total prize ball number image G6 indicating the total prize ball number paid out based on the winning in the special winning opening 14 in the jackpot game is displayed. Then, with the end of the jackpot game, it is assumed that the high-probability low base game state is set and the probability variation effect mode is set.

FIG. 112C shows the display unit 50a immediately after the probability variation effect mode is set. When the probability variation effect mode is set, the probability variation background image G120 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the specific acquisition number image G40 representing the specific acquisition number is displayed at a predetermined position of the display unit 50a as the probability variation background image G120. Displayed from above. Immediately after the jackpot game related to the jackpot winning when the normal production mode is set and the normal effect mode is set, the specific acquisition number image G40 is paid out based on the winning of the jackpot 14 in the jackpot game. It represents the total number of game balls played. In the probability variation effect mode, a right-handed image G41 that prompts right-handedness is displayed on the upper right of the display unit 50a.

Since right hitting is performed in the high probability low base game state, a small hit game may be executed. In the high-probability low-base game state, when the small hit game is executed and the big winning hole 14 is won and the game balls are paid out, the number of the paid game balls (15) is specified for each winning. The specific acquisition number is added to the acquisition number image G40, and the specific acquisition number indicated by the specific acquisition number image G40 increases (see FIGS. 112D to 112E).

Then, in the high-probability low-base game state, and in the probability variation effect mode, the special map variable display is continuously executed, and it is assumed that the jackpot is won again. Then, a jackpot game is played, and finally the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113(A). The total award ball number image G6 displayed in this ending effect is paid by winning the special winning opening 14 in the big hit game of this time, the first big hit game, and the small hit game performed in the high probability low base game state. It represents the number of gaming balls issued, that is, the specific acquisition number up to that point.

Subsequently, when the high-probability low base game state is set again and the probability variation effect mode is set, the small hit game is subsequently executed and the specific acquisition number increases (FIG. 113(B)). reference). Then, it is assumed that the condition for ending the high-probability low-base game state is satisfied. Specifically, it is assumed that after the high-probability low base game state is set, the special map variable display is executed 160 times without winning the jackpot. Then, just before the special figure variation effect according to the 160th special figure variable display ends, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a black special background image that suggests the end of the high-probability low base gaming state. (Special background image G121) is displayed, and the probability variation effect mode end suggestion image G42 that indicates that the probability variation effect mode is finished, and the final specific acquisition number image that represents the final specific acquisition number (final specific acquisition number) G43 is displayed.

The display of the special background image G121 and the display of the probability variation effect mode end suggestion image G42 and the final specific acquisition number image G43 are advantageous for suggesting that the game state advantageous to the player is terminated and the normal game state is returned to. It constitutes a game state end effect. The specific acquisition number image G40 is deleted when the special background image G121 is displayed.

Then, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the low probability low base game state, that is, the normal game state is set, and the probability variation effect mode is switched to the normal effect mode. When the mode is switched to the normal effect mode, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the set value effect count image G44 is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit 50a. It The set value effect count image G44 includes a number and a horizontally long rectangular frame surrounding the number, and the number portion represents a value obtained by subtracting the specific out number from the specific acquisition number. Hereinafter, this value will be referred to as a "set value effect count number". The set value effect count number represented when the set value effect count image G44 is displayed matches the maximum specific acquisition number.

After the normal game state is set, an out ball is generated, and each time the out ball is detected, the set value effect count number represented by the set value effect count image G44 is decremented by one. Then, as shown in FIGS. 114B to 114C, in the normal game state, the set value effect count number represented by the set value effect count image G44 is subtracted according to the progress of the game, and the final Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(D), when the set value effect count number represented by the set value effect count image G44 becomes “0”, the set value effect is executed.

The effect contents of the set value effect can be appropriately set within a range in which the player can recognize the set value. For example, even if the set value effect is executed by displaying the set value suggestion image G46 on the display unit 50a. good. The set value suggestion image G46 is composed of an image in which the main character and fellow characters of the main character play catch balls.

When the set value effect count number becomes “0”, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the hero character appears in the lower right portion of the display unit 50a and the fellow character appears in the lower left portion of the display unit 50a. Subsequently, the number "0" in the set value effect count image G44 changes to a ball, and as shown in FIG. 115(B), after falling, the main character catches the ball. This ball also constitutes the set value suggestion image G46. Then, as shown in FIG. 115(C), the protagonist character throws a ball toward the fellow character, and as shown in FIG. 115(D), the fellow character catches the ball.

Here, if the set value is "1", as shown in FIG. 116(A-1), after the main character and the fellow characters bow to suggest that the set value presentation is finished, As shown at 116 (B-1), the set value suggestion image G46 disappears. On the other hand, if the setting value is “2” or more, as shown in FIG. 116(A-2), the fellow character throws a ball toward the main character, and as shown in FIG. 116(B-2), The main character catches the ball.

Then, if the setting value is "3", as shown in FIGS. 116(A-1) to 116(B-1), the main character and the fellow characters bow and disappear. If the set value is "3" or more, the protagonist character throws the ball toward the fellow character again as shown in FIG. 115(C), and the fellow character takes the ball as shown in FIG. 115(D). To catch. In this way, in the set value presentation, the number of catch balls is performed according to the set value.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 115(B), the set value effect count image G44 is changed to a part of the set value suggestion image G46, so that the display of the set value suggestion image G46 is a big hit such as so-called “notice effect”. It is not an effect that suggests that a game may be executed, but an effect that suggests a set value. The change from the set value effect count image G44 to the set value suggestion image G46 is referred to as "set value suggestive suggestion effect".

Next, an example of a process for executing the set value effect will be described. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the opening command when the normal game state is set and the normal effect mode is set, and in the opening effect start process of step S4314, a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, The specific acquisition number count flag is turned on. The production control microcomputer 121 counts the specific acquisition number when the specific acquisition number count flag is ON.

A set value effect counter 129 is provided in the effect RAM 124 to count the specific acquisition number (see FIG. 117). In the received command analysis processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command has been received, as in the case of the start winning command. When determining that the special winning opening winning command has been received, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the specific acquisition number count flag is ON. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the specific acquisition number count flag is ON, “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the special winning opening 14 is set in the set value production counter 129. to add.

The specific acquisition number count flag is turned off when the normal effect mode is set. The effect control microcomputer 121 sets the normal effect mode when the special figure variable display is executed 160 times without winning the jackpot after the probability variation effect mode is set. Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the normal effect mode when the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot after the time saving effect mode is set. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 does not receive a special figure variation start command indicating a big hit after the probability variation effect mode is set, or after the time saving effect mode is set, for example, 160 or 100 pieces. After receiving the special figure fluctuation start command of No., when the special figure fluctuation end command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start command is received, the normal effect mode is set in the special figure fluctuation effect end process of step S4308. The effect control microcomputer 121 changes the effect mode flag indicating the probability variation effect mode or the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 to the effect mode flag indicating the normal effect mode. To set the normal effect mode.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 shifts from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player including the jackpot gaming state, the high-probability low base gaming state, and the low-probability high base gaming state, and then the advantageous game. It is possible to count the specific acquisition number, which is the number of game balls acquired until the game returns from the state to the normal game state (hereinafter referred to as "advantageous game state stay period").

When the specific acquisition number count flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the specific acquisition number indicating the specific acquisition number, which is the counter value of the set value effect counter 129, in the effect mode setting process (S4319). The command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140.

Upon receiving the specific acquisition number display command, the image control board 140 displays the specific acquisition number image G40 indicating the specific acquisition number indicated by the specific acquisition number display command. The image control board 140 displays the specific acquisition number image G40 indicating the specific acquisition number when the probability variation effect mode or the time saving effect mode is set and the probability variation background image G120 or the time saving background image G130 is displayed.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 also receives the special winning opening winning command and updates the set value effect counter 129, that is, when “15” is added, the counter value of the updated set value effect counter 129, that is, the specific acquisition. The specific acquisition number display command indicating the number is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140. The image control board 140, when receiving the specific acquisition number display command while displaying the specific acquisition number image G40, changes to the specific acquisition number image G40 representing the specific acquisition number indicated by the specific acquisition number display command.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 temporarily displays the temporary stop of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 according to the jackpot determination result, before a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the special effect variation effect immediately before the normal effect mode is set. And an advantageous game state end effect are executed. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 sets an advantageous game state end production start command and a final specific acquisition number display command indicating the final specific acquisition number, which is the specific acquisition number at that time, in the output buffer of the production RAM 124, It is transmitted to the image control board 140.

When the image control board 140 receives the advantageous game state end production start command and the final specific acquisition number display command, it performs temporary stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 according to the jackpot determination result, and also produces the advantageous game state end production. Run. Specifically, the special background image G121 is displayed, and the probability variation mode end suggestion image G42 and the final specific acquisition number image G43 are displayed.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the specific acquisition number count flag when setting the normal effect mode in the special figure variation effect end process of step S4308, and counts out balls in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Turn on the flag. When the out-ball count flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a countdown toward the set value effect based on the out-ball.

For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the out-ball count flag is ON in the received command analysis process. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the out-ball count flag is ON, it determines whether or not an out designation command has been received. When the production control microcomputer 121 determines that the out designation command has been received, the production control microcomputer 121 decrements the set value production counter 129 to “1” according to the occurrence of the out ball. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the counter value of the set value effect counter 129 is “0”. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the counter value of the set value effect counter 129 is “0”, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect and turns off the out-ball count flag.

In order to execute the set value effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a set value effect start command indicating a set value in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 based on the set value flag, and sends it to the image control board 140. When the image control board 140 receives the set value effect start command, the number of the set value effect count image G44 is set to “0” on the display unit 50a, and after the set value suggestive hint effect is performed, the set value effect start is started. The above-mentioned set value effect that suggests the set value indicated by the command is executed.

Further, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the counter value of the set value effect counter 129 is not "0", the set value effect is reduced in order to subtract "1" from the number represented by the set value effect count image G44. A set value effect count image change command indicating the counter value of the counter 129 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140. When receiving the set value effect count image change command, the image control board 140 changes the number of the set value effect count image G44 to the counter value indicated by the set value effect count image change command, and changes the set value effect count image G44. To do.

Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the twelfth embodiment, when the number of out balls reaches the number of gaming balls acquired in the big hit game or the small hit game, a set value effect suggesting a set value is executed. It Therefore, the smaller the number of game balls acquired, the shorter the period until the set value presentation, and the larger the number of game balls acquired, the longer the period until the set value presentation. When the set value effect is executed, the player can recognize the set value, and therefore it is more advantageous for the player to execute the set value effect than not execute the set value effect. Here, the fact that the number of game balls obtained is small is disadvantageous to the player, but the more disadvantageous it is, the easier it is to execute the set value effect more advantageous to the player, and the disadvantageous portion to the player is compensated. It Therefore, the player's disappointment can be suppressed and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, the set value effect is executed after returning from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. Therefore, the player can recognize the set value when the game is continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in game motivation after returning to the normal game state and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Modification of the twelfth embodiment)
In the twelfth embodiment, in the advantageous game state stay period, the number of game balls paid out by winning the special winning opening 14 in the big hit game and the small hit game is set as the specific acquisition number, and the set value effect is executed. However, the threshold value may be set appropriately. For example, the number of game balls paid out by winning the special winning opening 14 in the jackpot game performed in the advantageous game state stay period may be set as the set value production reference value. On the contrary, the number of game balls paid out by winning in the special winning opening 14 in the small hit game performed in the advantageous game state stay period may be set as the set value production reference value.

Furthermore, not only the game ball paid out by winning the big winning opening 14, but also the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed, by winning the starting opening 11, 12 or the general winning opening 10. The paid game balls may be added to the set value effect reference value.

Further, in the twelfth embodiment, one set value effect is executed based on the number of game balls paid out by the big hit game and the number of game balls paid out by the small hit game, but the big hit The set value effect based on the number of game balls paid out by the game and the set value effect based on the number of game balls paid out by the small hit game may be separately performed. Here, basically, the number of game balls paid out by the jackpot game is larger. That is, after returning from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, the set value effect related to the small hit game is likely to be executed earlier. Therefore, in the set value effect related to the small hit game, the set value is “1” to “3” and the set value is relatively low, or the set value is “4” to “6” and the set value is relatively high. It may be suggested that the set value can be specified in the set value effect related to the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the game balls that have won the first starting port 11 and the like are included in the out balls, but the game balls that have won the first starting port 11 and the like are not detected, and the game balls enter the out port 19. A sensor for detecting only the entered game balls is provided, and the set value effect is executed when the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 through the outlet 19 reaches the final specified acquisition number. Is also good.

The effect contents of the set value effect are not limited to the twelfth embodiment, and may be appropriately set. The set value effect may be executed using an image other than the set value suggestion image G43. Further, the set value effect may be executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board movable device 55. For example, when performing the set value effect using the speaker 52, the set value may be suggested by outputting a voice set for each set value.

Further, the effect contents of the set value effects correspond to the set values on a one-to-one basis, but a plurality of effect contents are set so that one effect content may have a plurality of set values. It may be configured such that there is a high possibility that it is a certain set value depending on the content.

Further, although the specific acquired number image G40 and the final specified acquired number image G43 are displayed in the probability variation effect mode and the time saving effect mode, either one or either of them may not be displayed. Furthermore, although the set value suggestive suggestion effect is executed before performing the set value suggestion, the set value suggestive suggestion effect may not be executed. That is, when the set value effect is executed, the set value effect count image G44 and the set value suggestion image G46 may not be linked.

Further, the basic playability (so-called “spec”) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not limited to that in the twelfth embodiment, and may be set appropriately. For example, a small hit may be won by the big hit determination, but the game may be such that no small hit is provided. Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 does not execute the special figure 2 variable display when the special figure 1 variable display is executed, and the special figure 1 variable display when the special figure 2 variable display is executed. However, it is also possible to perform so-called "simultaneous variation" so that the special figure 1 variable display and the special figure 2 variable display are executed at the same time.

Further, the number of out balls may be counted after the jackpot game is over, and the set value effect may be executed when the number of the out balls reaches the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game.

Further, the conditions for executing the set value effect may be set to items other than the specific acquisition number and the specific out number. For example, the total number of round games played in the advantageous game state stay period, the number of times of jackpot games executed, or the number of times of high probability state may be set as the condition for executing the set value effect. In this case, the shorter the total number of round games played in the advantageous game state stay period, the number of jackpot games executed, or the number of times of occurrence of a high probability state, the more disadvantageous the player becomes, and the earlier the set value production is executed. Therefore, these conditions are associated with the period until the set value effect is executed.

For example, it is possible to associate the total number of round games played in the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of times of high probability state with the number of executions and time of the special figure variable display. If the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the special figure variable as the total number of round games played in the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of occurrences of the high probability state becomes disadvantageous to the player. Set so that the number of display executions is reduced. For example, when the condition for executing the set value effect is associated with the number of times of executing the big hit game, 30 special figure variable displays are associated with one big hit game, and the number of big hit games x 30 times The set value effect may be executed when the variable display is executed. Alternatively, if it is time, the special time is shortened as the total number of round games played in the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of occurrences of the high probability state becomes disadvantageous to the player. Set. For example, when the condition for executing the set value effect is associated with the number of times of executing the jackpot game, the time of 5 minutes is associated with one jackpot game, and when the number of times of the jackpot game x 5 minutes elapses. You may make it perform setting value production.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, after the normal game state is set and the final specific acquisition number is confirmed, the set value effect count number is counted based on the out ball, but for example, the first big hit game. The set value effect count number may be counted based on the out-ball after the execution of. In this case, if a big hit game or a small hit game is executed before the set value effect count number becomes "0", the number of game balls acquired at that time is added to the set value count value each time. .. Moreover, even if the special condition variable display is executed a predetermined number of times after the normal game state is set, if the specific condition is satisfied after the normal game state is set, the set value effect count number may be counted. good.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the thirteenth embodiment, a setting value effect different from the setting value effects described in the present embodiment and before is executed. Note that the thirteenth embodiment will mainly describe differences from the embodiments before this embodiment. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the embodiments before this embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

The set value effect of the present embodiment includes a first set value effect that indicates whether the set value that is set is an odd number or an even number, and a set value that the set value that is set is relatively high (hereinafter , "High set value"). The first set value effect further suggests an odd number suggestive first set value effect that suggests that an odd set value is set, and an even suggestive first setting that suggests that an even set value is set. There is value production.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment is configured such that “1, 2, 5, 6” among the set values described in the basic embodiment can be set. Therefore, the even set value is the set value “2” or the set value “6”, and the odd set value is the set value “1” or the set value “5”. Further, the high set value is the set value “5” or the set value “6”. Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the ending condition for the high probability high base game state is not set, and when the high probability high base game state is set when the jackpot game ends, that is, the jackpot symbol A, In the case of the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol E, and the jackpot symbol F, the probability variation effect mode is set. On the other hand, as the ending condition for the low probability high base game state, the number of executions of the special figure variation display is set to "100 times" as described later, and the low probability high base game state is set when the jackpot game ends. Is set to a time saving effect mode that indicates a time saving state.

The first set value suggestion effect is performed at the opening of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the second set value effect is performed just before the normal high probability base game state ends and the normal game state is set. In other words, once the jackpot game is executed and the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, the second set value effect is performed just before returning to the normal game state.

Next, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. Note that, since the specific example of the set value effect described below is an example, the effect content is not limited to the specific example described, and can be appropriately changed.

First, the first set value effect will be described. When the first setting value effect is performed, it is executed in the opening effect of the jackpot game, but when the first setting value effect is not executed in the opening effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the display unit In 50a, an opening background image G200 according to the type of jackpot game is displayed, and an opening image G1 and a right hitting image G2 are displayed from above the background image G200. In the following, the opening effect in which the first set value effect is not executed is referred to as a "normal opening effect".

When the set value “2” or the set value “6” is set and the even suggestive first set value effect is executed in the opening effect, as shown in FIG. 118(B), in addition to the normal opening effect, An even set value suggesting image G50 that suggests that an even set value is set is superposedly displayed on the opening background image G200 and the opening image G1 on the display unit 50a. The display of this even set value suggestion image G50 constitutes an even suggested first set value effect.

Further, when the set value “1” or the set value “5” is set and the odd number suggestion first set value effect is executed in the opening effect, in addition to the normal opening effect, as shown in FIG. 118(C). Thus, the odd set value suggestion image G51 indicating that the odd set value is set is displayed on the opening background image G200 and the opening image G1 in a superimposed manner on the display unit 50a. The display of the odd set value suggestion image G51 constitutes the odd set suggested first set value effect.

In the present embodiment, the even set value suggestion image G50 is composed of two cheerleaders. This number suggests that the set value is an even number. On the other hand, the odd set value suggestion image G51 is composed of three cheerleaders. This number suggests that the set value is an odd number. Note that the specific display contents of the even-numbered set value suggestion image G50 and the odd-numbered set value suggestion image G51 are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 118(B) and 118(C), and may be changed appropriately. It may be suggested that the set values are even and odd by some quantity shown in the image. Further, the even set value suggesting image G50 and the odd set value suggesting image G51 are composed of different images regardless of the quantity, so that the even set value suggesting image G50 and the odd set value suggesting image G51 can be distinguished. It may be suggested that the set values are even and odd.

Next, the second set value effect will be described. The second set value effect is performed just before the low probability high base gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set when the ending condition relating to the low probability high base gaming state is satisfied. Here, the ending condition of the specific game state in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the ending condition shown in FIG. 16(B) is set for the specific game state. That is, the end condition for the high probability high base game state is not set, and the end condition for the low probability high base game state is set.

The ending condition for the low-probability-high base game state is set by the number of executions of the special figure variable display. Specifically, the number of executions of the special figure variable display "100 times" is set as the ending condition of the low-probability-high base game state. That is, when the low probability high base game state is set and the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the low probability high base game state ends and the normal game state is set. Hereinafter, the number of times this special figure variable display is executed is referred to as a “specific specified number of times”.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the time saving state is different from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the time saving state according to the thirteenth embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the high probability high base gaming state, and the special figure 2 variation pattern in the low probability high base gaming state It is divided by the judgment table.

The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the high probability high base game state is configured the same as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the low probability high base game state is, as shown in FIG. 119, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (TBL) used for the special figure variation display other than the specific prescribed number of times. 8-2-5 to TBL.8-2-8) and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (TBL.8-2-9 to TBL.8-) used for the special figure fluctuation display at the specific prescribed number of times. It is divided by 2-11). The special figure variation display at times other than the specified prescribed number of times is the special figure variation display of the first to 99th times when the low probability high base game state is set, and the special figure variation display at the specified prescribed number of times The low probability high base game state is set, which is the 100th special figure variation display.

As shown in FIG. 119, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for the special figure variation display at times other than the specific prescribed number of times is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination in the time saving state in the basic embodiment shown in FIG. It has the same structure as the table. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for the special figure variation display at the specific prescribed number of times is configured differently from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in the time saving state in the basic embodiment shown in FIG. Has been done. Specifically, the special figure fluctuation time at the time of a big hit is set to 10 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time at the time of losing is set to 15 seconds regardless of the reach determination result.

In addition, the production flow of special figure variation production at the time of a big jackpot (special jackpot variation) is composed of only normal variations. That is, although not shown, 10 seconds after the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit without developing into reach is performed.

On the other hand, the effect flow of the special figure change effect when there is a loss (special failure variation) is composed of normal variation and result display. In the thirteenth embodiment, the result display is an effect that is executed in the special figure variation display immediately before the low-probability-high base game state ends and returns to the normal game state. That is, the result display is an effect corresponding to the end of the low-probability-high base game state and the return to the normal game state.

In the special figure variation effect at the time of losing (special variation), for example, as shown in FIGS. 120(A) to 120(B), 10 seconds after the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, As shown in FIG. 120(C), the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of a so-called “separated pattern” indicating a loss is performed without developing to reach and the like.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 121(A), after the display unit 50a is entirely blacked out, as shown in FIG. 121(B-1), the result display is superimposed on the blackout. In the result display, the result display image G52 is displayed. In the result display image G52, the number of times the jackpot is won during the period from when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state to when the low-probability-high base gaming state is ended (hereinafter, also referred to as "the relevant period") (in FIG. 121, " The number of big hits XX times: hereinafter referred to as the number of big hits), and the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game related to the big hit winning (in FIG. 121, “balls obtained XXXXX”): "The number of winning jackpot balls") is displayed.

In the result display image G52, the number of times the jackpot is won is displayed in the "XX" portion of the "bonus number XX times". On the other hand, in the "○○○○○○" part of the "acquired ball ○○○○○○○ ball" in the result display image G52, the number of award balls acquired in the jackpot game related to the jackpot win in the period is displayed. .. It should be noted that the number of times the jackpot is won includes the jackpot win in the first normal gaming state. In addition, the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the jackpot 14 in the jackpot game.

Then, after the result display is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 121(C), the blackout and the result display are finished, and the first normal background image G111 related to the normal gaming state. Along with switching to, the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been displayed before and which show the lost eye, is stopped. After the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed for the special figure fixing time, the effect in the normal effect mode is performed.

In this way, when the ending condition is satisfied in the low-probability-high base gaming state, just before the end of the last special map variation display in the low-probability-high base gaming state, in other words, from the gaming state advantageous to the player to the normal gaming state. The result display is always performed just before the end of the special map variation display immediately before returning to. When the high set value, specifically, the set value “5” or the set value “6” is set, the second set value effect is executed while the result display is being performed.

The second set value effect is performed together with the result display after a blackout as shown in FIG. 121(A) is performed, for example. Specifically, as the second set value effect, as shown in FIG. 121(B-2), a high set value suggestion image G53 that indicates that a high set value is suggested is displayed. Here, the high set value suggestion image G53 is composed of a plurality of companions of the hero character, and these characters are displayed around the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the result display image G52. The display content and display position of the high set value suggestion image G53 are not limited to the specific example of FIG. 121(B-2), and may be changed appropriately.

Next, an example of a process for executing the first set value effect and the second set value effect will be described. However, since the processing content described below is an example, the processing for executing the first set value effect and the second set value effect is not limited to the following description content, and may be appropriately changed.

First, a process for executing the first set value effect will be described. After receiving the opening command, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the first set value effect in addition to the determination of the content of the opening effect in the jackpot opening effect start process of step S4314. Processing (first set value effect processing) is performed.

In the first set value effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 first acquires the value indicated by the first set value effect execution determination random number counter as the first set value effect execution determination random number. The first set value effect execution determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the first set value effect execution determination based on the first set value effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 122, the first set value effect execution determination table includes a first set value effect execution determination table used when the set value is "1" and a first set value effect execution determination table which is used when the set value is "2". There are a set value effect execution determination table, a first set value effect execution determination table used when the set value is "5", and a first set value effect execution determination table used when the set value is "6". That is, a plurality of first set value effect execution determination tables are provided in association with the set values.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag stored in the set value flag storage unit 128 at the time of the first set value effect execution determination, and associates the set value flag with the currently set value. Then, one of the first set value effect execution determination tables is selected.

In each of the first set value effect execution determination tables, the value of the first set value effect execution determination random number (first set value effect execution determination value) is set to the first setting so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 122 is obtained. It is configured to be appropriately distributed depending on whether or not value performance can be performed. The first set value effect execution determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

In the first set value effect execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired first set value effect execution determination random number with the selected first set value effect execution determination table, and executes the first set value effect. Decide whether to accept.

As a result of the first set value effect execution determination, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines not to execute the first set value effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the first set value effect process and returns to the opening effect start process. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the set value is an even number or an odd number when it is determined that the first set value effect is executed as a result of the first set value effect execution determination. That is, the effect type of the first set value effect is determined.

If the setting control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is an even number, that is, if the setting value is “2” or the setting value is “6”, the even first set value production start representing the even first set value production is started. The command is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the even first set value effect start command, the image control board 140 superimposes the even set value suggestion image G50 on the opening background image G200 and the like on the display unit 50a.

On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is an odd number, that is, when it is the set value “1” or the set value “5”, the odd first set value representing the odd first set value effect. The effect start command is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the odd first set value effect start command, the image control board 140 superimposes the odd set value suggestion image G51 on the opening background image G200 and the like on the display unit 50a.

The image control board 140 erases the even set value suggestive image G50 and the odd set value suggestive image G51 when Round 1 is started. That is, the first set value effect ends with the opening. However, the end timing of the first set value effect is not limited to this, and it may be continuously executed in the same mode or in a different mode even if a round game is entered.

Next, a process for performing the second set value effect will be described. When the low probability high base game state is set after the big hit game, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the time saving effect mode that suggests that it is the aforementioned time saving state in the effect mode setting process of step S4319. Specifically, a time saving effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124.

Further, when setting the time saving effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the time saving effect mode remaining number counter to "100" corresponding to the specific restriction number related to the low probability high base gaming state. The time saving effect mode remaining number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124 and indicates the remaining number of special figure variation effects in the time saving effect mode.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the special figure fluctuation start command at the start of the special figure fluctuation effect, the counter value of the time saving effect mode remaining number counter is decremented by “1” before performing the special figure fluctuation effect start process. By doing so, the remaining number of special figure variation effects in the time saving effect mode is measured.

If the counter value of the time saving effect mode remaining number counter becomes "0" and the special figure fluctuation display at that time is a special deviation fluctuation, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the second set value effect in the special figure fluctuation effect. It is determined whether to do. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the second set value effect after determining the special figure change effect pattern in the special figure change effect start process. Make a decision.

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the second set value effect based on the set value flag stored in the set value flag storage unit 128 as the second set value effect execution determination. If the set value is a preset high set value (the set value “5” and the set value “6” in the thirteenth embodiment), the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the second set value effect. ..

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the second set value effect, that is, when the set value is "5" or the set value "6", the second set value effect start indicating the second set value effect is started. The command is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140. When the image control board 140 receives the second set value effect start command, as described above, when the result display is performed just before the special figure variation effect is finished, the high set value suggestion image is displayed as the second set value effect. Display G53.

Further, if the counter value of the time saving effect mode remaining number counter is "0" and the special figure fluctuation display at that time is a special deviation fluctuation, the special effect fluctuation is performed at the end of the special figure fluctuation display. When the end command is received, the time reduction effect mode is switched to the normal effect mode regardless of whether or not the second set value effect can be executed. Specifically, the time saving effect mode flag set in the effect RAM 124 is switched to the normal effect mode flag indicating the normal effect mode.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a normal effect mode start command indicating the normal effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 and transmits it to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the normal effect mode start command, the image control board 140 displays the first normal background image G111 as a background image on the display unit 50a.

Next, a process for displaying a result that is performed together with the second set value effect will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 indicates that the game ball has won in the special winning opening 14 in the special winning opening prize ball processing (S224) of the sensor detection processing. The winning opening winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

When the jackpot game is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds "14" to the counter value of the jackpot acquisition prize ball number counter each time the jackpot winning command is received. This “14” corresponds to the number of prize balls paid out by winning the prize in the special winning opening 14. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the counter value of the jackpot winning award ball number counter to “0” when setting the normal effect mode. In other words, the jackpot winning award ball number counter represents the number of award balls that have been won as a result of winning the jackpot in the jackpot game that is performed until the jackpot is won once and then returned to the normal gaming state. The jackpot winning prize number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 increments the counter value of the jackpot counter by “1” every time the opening command is received. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the counter value of the jackpot number counter to “0” when setting the normal effect mode. That is, the jackpot number counter includes the jackpot once the jackpot is won, and represents the number of jackpots won before returning to the normal gaming state. The jackpot counter is provided in the effect RAM 124.

When the counter value of the time saving effect mode remaining number counter becomes “0” and the special figure variation display at that time is a special deviation variation, the special effect variation production start process performs the special figure variation production start process. After determining the variable effect pattern, the jackpot acquisition prize ball number command representing the counter value of the jackpot acquisition prize ball number counter and the jackpot count command representing the counter value of the jackpot count counter are set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the image is displayed. It is transmitted to the control board 140. When the image control board 140 receives the jackpot winning prize number command and the jackpot number command, as described above, as a result display, the result showing the jackpot number and the jackpot winning prize ball number is displayed just before the special figure variation effect is finished. The display image G52 is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the thirteenth embodiment, when returning from the game state advantageous to the player to the normal game state, the second set value effect that suggests the high set value is executed. To be done. Therefore, the player's disappointment caused by returning to the normal game state can be alleviated, and the player's willingness to play can be improved. Moreover, when the result is displayed on the display unit 50a and the player can easily pay attention to the display unit 50a, the second set value effect is performed on the display unit 50a, so that the effect of the second set value effect is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Also, in the jackpot game that is pleasing to the player, a first set value effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number, specifically, an even suggestive first set value effect and an odd number suggestive first set value effect. May be executed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. Further, since it is suggested that the set value is an even number or an odd number in the first set value effect, and that the set value is a high set value in the second set value effect, the effect contents of the first set value effect are The player can grasp a more accurate set value based on whether or not the second set value effect is executed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the opening of the jackpot game corresponds to the start of the game state advantageous to the series of players, and the time just before returning to the normal game state corresponds to the end of the game state advantageous to the series of players. Therefore, different kinds of set value effects are performed at the beginning and the end of a series of game states that are advantageous to the player, such as the jackpot game state, the high-probability high-base game state, and the low-probability high-base game state. As a result, the interest of the game for the game state advantageous to the series of players is improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the low probability high base game state is set after the jackpot game, and an example of returning to the normal game state is shown, but the low probability high base game state is set once the jackpot is won. In the meantime, a high-probability-high base gaming state is set, and a big win is won in the high-probability-high base gaming state (so-called "renso"), and a big jackpot is won in the setting of a low-probability-high base gaming state (so-called. "Pullback" is also included in a series of player-friendly game states.

(Modification of thirteenth embodiment)
In the thirteenth embodiment, the first setting value effect is executed at the opening of the jackpot game, but the execution time of the first setting value effect is not limited to this, and the first setting value effect is executed by a round game or ending. May be. Also, the second set value effect is executed just before the end of the special figure variation effect immediately before returning to the normal game state, but the execution time of the second set value effect is not limited to this, immediately before returning to the normal game state. The second set value effect may be executed at the start of or during the special figure variation effect. Alternatively, the first set value effect may be performed by the special figure variation effect immediately before returning to the normal game state, and the second set value effect may be performed by the opening of the jackpot game.

The effect contents of the first set value effect are not limited to those in the thirteenth embodiment and may be changed appropriately. For example, the specific display content of the even set value suggestion image G50 and the odd set value suggestion image G51 may be changed. Further, it may be suggested whether the set value is an even number or an odd number depending on the display mode of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. For example, the opening image G1 or the right-handed image G2 in the normal mode, the opening image G1 or the right-handed image G2 in the display mode that suggests that the setting value is even, and the display mode that suggests that the setting value is odd. The opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2 may be provided. Further, the first set value effect may be executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50.

Furthermore, the effect contents of the second set value effect are not limited to those in the thirteenth embodiment, and may be changed appropriately. For example, the specific display content of the high set value suggestion image G53 may be changed. In addition, the display mode of the result display image G52 may indicate a high set value. For example, the result display image G52 in the normal mode and the result display image G52 in the display mode suggesting a high set value may be provided. Further, the second set value effect may be executed by using an effect device other than the image display device 50.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the end condition for the high probability high base game state is not provided, but the end condition is set according to the number of executions of the special figure variation display like the low probability high base game state, and the high probability high base is set. The second set value effect may be executed immediately before the end of the special figure variation effect immediately before the game state ends and the normal game state returns. Further, the ending condition of the high-probability-high base game state or the low-probability-high base game state is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variation display, and may be changed to other contents such as a so-called “falling lottery” lottery result. Further, the normal game state may be set after the big hit game, and the result display and the second set value effect may be executed at the ending of the big hit game.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the result display is always displayed in the special figure variation effect immediately before returning to the normal game state, but the result display may not be performed. Further, although the number of big hits and the number of winning big prize balls are displayed in the result display image G52, the display content of the result display image G52 is not limited to that of the thirteenth embodiment and may be set appropriately.

Also, the first set value effect is configured to be executable in each jackpot game, but once executed, the execution of the first set value effect is restricted so that it is not executed until the normal game state is set thereafter. You may. In this case, when the big hit is won in the normal game state, the first set value effect may be always executed in the big hit game. Further, the second set value effect is always executed in the special figure variation effect immediately before returning to the normal gaming state, but the second set value effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. ..

Further, even if the odd set value is set, the even suggestive first set value effect may not be executed, but if the odd set value is set, the even suggestive first set value effect may be executed. You can Similarly, the odd number suggestion first set value effect may be executed when an even set value is set.

Also, basically, it is highly likely that the even set first value effect will be an even set value, and the odd suggestive first set value effect will be an odd set value. Although the value is high, the even suggestion first set value effect may be executed when the set value is an odd number, and the odd suggestion first set value effect may be executed when the set value is an even number. .. In this case, since the first set value effect can be executed in each jackpot game, the larger the number of jackpot wins, in other words, the more the number of consecutive games, the more the set value is set, depending on the type of the first set value effect executed. It becomes possible to accurately grasp whether it is an even number or an odd number.

Further, the second set value effect is not executed when the relatively low set value is set, but when the relatively low set value is set, a predetermined probability (for example, 5 %), the second set value effect may be executed. Furthermore, even when a relatively low set value is set, even if an effect suggesting that a relatively low set value is set is executed in the special figure variation effect immediately before returning to the normal game state. good.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention. In the fourteenth embodiment, a setting value effect different from the setting value effects described before the present embodiment is executed. In the fourteenth embodiment, the points different from the previous embodiments will be mainly described. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the embodiments before this embodiment or configurations corresponding to the same.

In the set value effect of the present embodiment, a high set value effect that suggests that the set value that is set is a relatively high set value (hereinafter, referred to as “high set value”), and the set value that is set. There is a low set value effect that suggests that the value is a relatively low set value (hereinafter referred to as "low set value"). Both the high set value effect and the low set value effect can be executed at the start of the L reach in the normal game state (normal effect mode).

Note that in the fourteenth embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, a set value “1”, a set value “2”, a set value “5”, and a set value “6” are provided. Then, the set value "1" and the set value "2" are set to low set values, and the set value "5" and the set value "6" are set to high set values. Further, for convenience, the effect contents of the SP reach described in the basic embodiment are applied to the L reach.

In the fourteenth embodiment, five L reach production types are set. Specifically, L reach A, L reach B, L reach C, L reach D, and L reach E are set as the production types of L reach. Then, in the L-reach, a background image (background image for L-reach) G116 dedicated to the L-reach is displayed on the display unit 50a, in which an image in which the main character who is the pitcher and the enemy character who is the batter are confronted flows. The content displayed on the L reach background image G116 differs depending on the reach production type.

In L reach A, an image in which the main character plays a battle with the enemy character A is played. Similarly, in L reach B, an image of the main character fighting against the enemy character B flows, in L reach C, an image of the main character fighting against the enemy character C flows, and in L reach D, the main character fights against the enemy character D. An image of the main character fighting against the enemy character E flows in L reach E.

Next, a specific example of the set value effect of the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In addition, since the set value effect described below is an example, the effect content is not limited to the specific example described and can be appropriately changed.

The set value effect can be executed at the start of the L reach, but the start time of the L reach when the set value effect is not executed first will be described. When the L reach is started, the image is switched to the L reach background image G116, and an image (L reach start title image) G14 indicating that the L reach is started is displayed on the L reach background image G116. 123(A) shows the start time of L reach A, FIG. 123(B) shows the start time of L reach B, FIG. 123(C) shows the start time of L reach C, and FIG. 123(D). Represents the start time of L reach D, and FIG. 123(E) represents the start time of L reach E.

As shown in FIGS. 123(A) to 123(E), at the start of the L reach, the enemy image associated with the effect type of each L reach is displayed in the L reach background image G116. In addition, the L-reach start title image G14 represents the enemy character name associated with the effect type of each L-reach. The L-reach start title image G14 is erased after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) at the start of the L-reach, but the L-reach background image G116 is also displayed after that and the main character is A battle with an enemy character is developed.

Next, the low set value effect will be described. The low set value effect is executed with the same effect content regardless of the effect type of L reach. Specifically, as the low set value effect, the low set value suggestion image G54 common to all the effect types of L reach is displayed. FIGS. 124(A) to 124(E) show a state in which low set value effects having the same effect contents are being executed on the display unit 50a at the start of L reach A to L reach E. In the fourteenth embodiment, the low set value suggestion image G54 has a design that imitates a skull with two bats and one ball, but the specific display content may be changed appropriately. Is also good.

Next, the high set value effect will be described. The high set value effect is executed with the effect contents associated with the effect type of L reach. Specifically, as the high set value effect, the high set value suggestion image G55 set for each effect type of L reach is displayed. FIGS. 125(A) to 125(E) show a state in which high set value effects having effect contents different from each other are executed on the display unit 50a at the start of the L reach A to L reach E. The high set value suggestion images G55a to G55e represent the results (batting rate (AVG), number of home runs (HR), and hitting points (RBI)) of the enemy character associated with the effect type of each L reach.

As shown in FIGS. 125(A) to 125(E), the high set value suggestion image G55 includes a high set value suggest image G55a for L reach A and a high set value suggest image G55b for L reach B. , A high set value suggestion image G55c for L reach C, a high set value suggestion image G55d for L reach D, and a high set value suggestion image G55e for L reach E.

Then, at the start of L reach A, a high set value suggestion image G55a for L reach A is displayed (FIG. 125(A)), and at the start of L reach B, a high set value suggestion image G55b for L reach B is displayed. When the L reach C is started (FIG. 125(B)), the high set value suggestion image G55c for the L reach C is displayed (FIG. 125(C)), and when the L reach D is started, the L reach D image is displayed. High set value suggestion image G55d is displayed (FIG. 125(D)), and when L reach E is started, high set value suggestion image G55e for L reach E is displayed (FIG. 125(E)).

The low set value suggestive image G54 and the high set value suggestive image G55 are erased after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) at the start of the L reach.

Next, an example of a process for executing the low set value effect and the high set value effect will be described. However, since the processing content described below is an example, the processing for executing the low setting value effect and the high setting value effect is not limited to the following description content, and may be appropriately changed.

After receiving the special figure variation start command, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is L reach variation in the special figure variation effect start processing of step S4306. When it is determined that there is L reach variation, the effect control microcomputer 121 first acquires the value indicated by the L reach type determination random number counter as the L reach type determination random number in order to determine the L reach effect type. The L reach type determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs L reach type determination based on the L reach type determination table. As shown in FIG. 126, the L reach type determination table includes an L reach type determination table used when the L jackpot variation and an L reach type determination table used when the L loss variation occurs. That is, a plurality of L reach type determination tables are provided in association with the jackpot determination result.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command received and stored at the time of the L reach type determination, and the L reach type determination table associated with the jackpot determination result. Select one.

In each L reach type determination table, the value of the random number for L reach type determination (L reach type determination value) is appropriately distributed to the production type of L reach so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 126 is obtained. Has been done. The L reach type determination table is stored in the production ROM 123.

In the L reach type determination, the production control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired L reach type determination random number with the selected L reach type determination table to determine the L reach production type. When the production type of L reach is determined, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a special figure variation effect start command reflecting the effect content in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 and transmits it to the image control board 140.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that there is L reach variation, the effect control microcomputer 121 further performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the set value effect (set value effect process). In the set value effect process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first acquires the value indicated by the set value effect execution determination random number counter as the set value effect execution determination random number. The random number counter for setting value effect execution determination is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the set value effect execution determination based on the set value effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 127, the set value effect execution determination table includes a set value effect execution determination table used when the L jackpot changes and a set value effect execution determination table used when the L loss changes. Further, these set value effect execution determination tables include a set value effect execution determination table used when the set value is “1”, a set value effect execution determination table used when the set value is “2”, and There are a set value effect execution determination table used when the value is "5" and a set value effect execution determination table used when the value is "6". That is, a plurality of set value effect execution determination tables are provided in association with the jackpot determination result and the set value.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121, when performing the set value effect execution determination, the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command received and stored, and the set value flag stored in the set value flag storage unit 128. Is confirmed, one of the set value effect execution determination tables associated with the jackpot determination result and the current set value being set is selected.

In each set value effect execution determination table, the value of the set value effect execution determination random number (set value effect execution determination value) is appropriately set to indicate whether or not the set value effect is executable so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 127 is obtained. It is configured to be distributed to. The set value effect execution determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

In the setting value effect execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired setting value effect execution determination random number with the selected setting value effect execution determination table, and determines whether or not to execute the setting value effect.

As a result of the set value effect execution determination, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines not to execute the set value effect, it ends the set value effect process and returns to the special figure variation effect start process. On the other hand, if the result of the set value effect execution determination determines that the set value effect is to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute the low set value effect or the high set value effect, that is, the set value effect. In order to determine the effect type (hereinafter, referred to as “set value effect type”), the value indicated by the set value effect type determining random number counter is acquired as the set value effect type determining random number. The random number counter for determining the set value effect type is provided in the effect RAM 124 and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process of step S4003.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the set value effect type determination based on the set value effect type determination table. As shown in FIG. 128, the set value effect type determination table includes a set value effect type determination table used when the set value is “1” and a set value effect type determination table used when the set value is “2”. And a set value effect type determination table used when the set value is "5" and a set value effect type determination table used when the set value is "6". That is, a plurality of set value effect type determination tables are provided in association with the set values.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag stored in the set value flag storage unit 128 at the time of determining the set value effect type, and makes a setting associated with the current set value being set. Select one value performance execution determination table.

In each set value effect type determination table, the value of the set value effect type determination random number (set value effect type determination value) is appropriately distributed to the set value effect type so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 128 is obtained. Is configured. The set value effect type determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

In the setting value effect type determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired setting value effect type determining random number with the selected setting value effect type determination table to determine the setting value effect type.

When the production control microcomputer 121 determines in the set value production type determination that it is a high set value production, it sets a high set value production start command indicating a high set value production in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and sets it on the image control board 140. Send. Upon receiving the high set value effect start command, the image control board 140 displays the high set value suggestion image G55 associated with the effect type of the L reach on the display unit 50a at the start of the L reach, so that the L reach The high set value effect associated with the effect type is executed. The image control board 140 recognizes the effect type of L reach by receiving the special figure variation start command.

On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the setting value effect type determination that it is a low setting value effect, it sets a low setting value effect start command representing a low setting value effect in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the image control board Send to 140. Upon receiving the low set value effect start command, the image control board 140 displays the low set value suggestion image G54 common to all the effect types of L reach on the display unit 50a at the start of the L reach, so that the L reach effect is displayed. The same low set value effect common to all effect types is executed.

According to the set value effect type determination table shown in FIG. 128, when the set value “1” and the set value “2” are set, it is always determined to be the low set value effect and the high set value effect. There is no such thing. On the other hand, when the set value “5” and the set value “6” are set, basically, it is determined to be the high set value effect, but it is rarely determined to be the low set value effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourteenth embodiment, the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed in the L reach, which has a lower jackpot expectation degree than the SP reach and is less interested by the player. Therefore, the player can be interested in the L reach and can be made to pay attention. Also, low set value effects that are unfavorable to the player are conservatively executed with the same effect content regardless of the effect type of L reach, and high set value effects that are advantageous to the player are effects associated with the effect type of L reach. Since the content is executed, the effect of the set value effect can be improved.

(Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment)
In the fourteenth embodiment, the set value effect is executed at the start of the L reach, but the execution time of the set value effect is not limited to this, and may be executed during the L reach or at the end. Further, the low set value effect and the high set value effect have the same execution time, but may be different.

Also, the type of reach effect may be changed appropriately. For example, a reach effect having a higher jackpot expectation than SP reach may be provided. Alternatively, a reach effect having a lower jackpot expectation than the L reach may be provided, and the set value effect may be executed in the reach effect. Further, the set value effect may be executed by a plurality of reach effects having relatively low jackpot expectations. In this case, different set value effects may be executed for each type of reach effect. Further, in this case, the set value effect may be executed with higher probability when the jackpot expectation of the reach effect is lower.

Further, the set value effect may be executed when an effect which is different from the reach effect and suggests that the jackpot expectation degree is low is being executed. Further, the set value effect may be executed when an effect that is not related to the jackpot expectation is being executed.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment, the probability that the set value effect execution determination determines to execute the set value effect differs depending on the set value, but may be the same regardless of the set value. Further, the probability of determining that the set value effect will be executed in the set value effect execution determination differs depending on the jackpot determination result for the same setting value, but is the same regardless of the jackpot determination result for the same setting value. Is also good.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the set value is "5" and the set value is "6", it may be determined as the low set value effect by the set value effect type determination, but it is determined as the low set value effect. Alternatively, only the high set value effect may be selected. On the other hand, when the set value is "1" and the set value is "2", the set value effect type determination is not determined to be the high set value effect, but may be determined to be the high set value effect. However, in this case, it is desirable that the probability of being determined as a high set value effect is lower than at least the probability of being determined as a low set value effect.

Further, the specific display contents of the low set value suggesting image G54 and the high set value suggesting image G55 may be appropriately changed. However, with regard to the display content of the high set value suggestion image G55, the effect of the high set value effect is improved if it is associated with the effect content of L reach. Further, the low set value effect and the high set value effect may be executed using different effect devices. Further, the high set value effect may be performed by using the speaker 52 instead of the image display device 50 or in addition to the image display device 50. In this case, for example, a high set value may be suggested by uttering different lines or the same line in the voice of the enemy character associated with the L-reach effect type.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment, either the low set value suggestive image G54 or the high set value suggestive image G55 can be displayed, while the low set value suggestive image G54 or the high set value suggestive image G55 is not displayed. There is. However, neither the low setting value suggesting image G54 nor the high setting value suggesting image G55 is not displayed, and the specific image is displayed as a default, and when the high setting value is set, a predetermined probability (for example, 90 %), the high set value suggestion image G55 may be displayed instead of the specific image. On the contrary, when the low set value is set, the low set value suggestion image G54 may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 90%) instead of the specific image.

7. Other Modified Examples Further modified examples of the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first to fourteenth embodiments will be described below.

The structures of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, a slide switch of a two-contact type may be used instead of the set value cylinder 70 as a machine that enables an operation of changing the set value. In this case, when the knob is arranged at one position, the operation of changing the set value may be performed. Further, a rotary switch or a slide switch may be used in place of the set value switch 71 as a machine for setting the set value. In this case, the knob position may be directly associated with the set value. Further, the positions of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and may be changed appropriately.

Further, the configuration of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed appropriately. For example, another display such as a dot matrix LED display may be used as the display for displaying the set value. Further, the position of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed appropriately. For example, the set value display 87 may be arranged at a location not on the game control board 100.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game RAM 104 is cleared by operating the set value cylinder 70 to change the set value, but the operation means for clearing the game RAM 104. May be provided so that the game RAM 104 can be cleared without performing the operation for changing the setting value.

Further, the set value fixing operation is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be set appropriately. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may recognize the rotation operation on the handle 72k, and the set value may be determined by the rotation operation of the handle 72k. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 can recognize the operation to the so-called "ball-renting button" or "return button", and the set value is determined by the operation to these buttons. Is also good.

Further, as the set values, six set values of the set value "1" to the set value "6" are provided, but the number of set values is not limited to six and may be set appropriately. The identification information for the set value is not limited to numbers such as "1" to "6" and may be characters or other symbols such as "A" to "F".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the special winning opening 14 can be opened in the big hitting game, but other than the big winning opening 14, a winning area that can be opened in the big hitting game may be provided.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high-probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting condition of the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device which can be opened and closed and which can enter the game ball when opened is provided at a position where the game ball in the game area 6 can reach, and a big hit game is being played. In a predetermined round game, when the second big winning device opens and the game ball that entered the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side, a high-probability state is accompanied with the end of the big hit game. May be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big winning device opens for an easy time (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second big winning device wins It is possible to provide a non-specific jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that makes it difficult to set a high probability state), which is opened for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Further, there are a specific region and a non-specific region as a region through which the game balls won in the second big winning device can pass, and a distribution device for allocating the game balls to the specific region and the non-specific region is provided. And although the opening time of the second big winning device is the same, by the combination of the opening mode of the second big winning device and the operating mode of the sorting device, the jackpot symbol and the high probability state that are easy to set the high probability state are set. It is also possible to provide a jackpot pattern that is difficult to set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the basic control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game) is performed on the effect control board 120. Although the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed on different substrates, such as, the configuration may be performed on one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

The setting value effects according to the first to fourteenth embodiments can be executed in different scenes, but the setting value effects according to the first to fourteenth embodiments are appropriately performed in one pachinko gaming machine PY1. You may be able to execute.

In addition, the game machine of the present invention may be applied to other ball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine, a rotating type game machine (so-called “slot machine”), etc. within a range not inconsistent. It is possible.

8. Other Inventions Disclosed in the Embodiments The following Inventions A to M are disclosed by the preceding paragraph in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]. In the description of the inventions A to M, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments of the invention and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. The invention A is a general term for the following inventions A1 to A6, the invention B is a general term for the following inventions B1 to B5, the invention C is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C8, and the invention D is The following inventions D1 to D4 are generic names, the invention E is a generic name of the following inventions E1 to E6, the invention F is a generic name of the following inventions F1 to F3, and the invention G is the following invention G1. To G3, Invention H is a generic term for Inventions H1 to H4 below, Invention I is a generic term for Inventions I1 to I5 below, and Invention J is a generic term for Inventions J1 to J4 below. The invention K is a general term for the following inventions K1 to K5, the invention L is a general term for the following inventions L1 to L3, and the invention M is a general term for the following inventions M1 to M3.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to Invention A1 is
A start winning area (starting openings 11, 12) provided in the game area (game area 6) where the game ball can flow down, and into which the game ball can enter
When the game ball enters the start winning area, it is determined (big hit determination) whether or not to make an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than usual (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determining means determines that the advantageous gaming state (the jackpot probability) is different,
The effect control means executes a specific effect (set value effect) relating to the set value set by the set value, based on the number of game balls (out balls) discharged to the outside of the game area. It is characterized by something.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The game machine according to Invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A1,
When the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area is at least a predetermined threshold value (out ball determination value) or more, the effect control unit determines that the determination unit sets the advantageous game state. The specific effect may be executed.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The game machine according to Invention A3 is
A game area (game area 6) in which the game balls can flow down is formed, and a prize area (general winning opening 10, starting openings 11, 12, and big winning opening 14) in which the game balls can enter the game area is provided. A gaming machine in which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter the winning area,
The winning area has a starting winning area (starting openings 11, 12),
When the game ball enters the start winning area, it is determined (big hit determination) whether or not to make an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than usual (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means is configured to set the setting value based on a difference number which is a difference between the number of paid out prize balls and the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area. It is characterized in that a specific effect (setting value effect) relating to the value may be executed.

8-1-4. Invention A4
The game machine according to Invention A4 is
A gaming machine according to Invention A3,
The effect control means may execute the specific effect when the difference number reaches a predetermined threshold value (difference number determination value).

8-1-5. Invention A5
The game machine according to Invention A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions A1 to A4,
The specific effect is an effect that suggests the setting value set by the setting value.

8-1-6. Invention A6
A gaming machine according to the invention A6,
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions A1 to A5,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The game machine according to Invention B1 is
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (the special starting point 1 holds the winning number in the starting port 11 when the number of holdings <4, the special starting point 2 wins in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings <4) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means can execute a specific effect (setting value effect) based on the setting value,
It is characterized in that the execution frequency of the specific effect differs depending on the set value.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The game machine according to Invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention B1,
The effect control means,
In the display unit (display unit 50a), based on the determination result by the determination unit, after the effect symbol (composite symbol G22) is variably displayed, it is possible to stop and display in a manner of notifying the determination result,
It is characterized in that the specific effect is executed with the effect pattern when the display is stopped.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The game machine according to Invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2,
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect when the determination means determines that the advantageous game state is not established.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The game machine according to Invention B4 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2 or invention B3,
The effect design has a first part (lottery result suggesting part G22a) regarding the determination result of the determining means and a second part (setting value suggesting part G22b) regarding the setting value,
The determination result of the determination means is notified by the content (number) displayed in the first part of the effect design stopped and displayed, and the content displayed in the second part of the effect design (◯, Δ, It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific effect in (x).

8-2-5. Invention B5
The game machine according to Invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of invention B1 to invention B5,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to Invention C1 is
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (the special starting point 1 holds the winning number in the starting port 11 when the number of holdings <4, the special starting point 2 wins in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings <4) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) that performs variable display of identification information (special view) for notifying the determination result on the display unit (special view display 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. A game control microcomputer 101),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect (setting value effect) relating to the setting value based on the number of times of execution of the variable display of the identification information.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention C1,
The set value is a natural number (1 to 6),
The effect control means can execute the specific effect on condition that a predetermined number of consecutive digits (lower two digits, lower three digits) of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same number. It is characterized by

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to Invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
The effect control means, the predetermined number of digits are the same number, the specific effect, provided that the determination result of the notification of the variable display of the identification information is the advantageous game state Is feasible.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to Invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2 or invention C3,
In the specific effect, a first specific effect (odd setting suggesting effect) that suggests that the setting value is odd, and a second specific effect (even setting suggesting effect) that suggests that the setting value is even. And there is
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute the first specific effect based on the predetermined number of digits being the same odd number,
The second specific effect can be executed based on the predetermined number of digits being the same even number.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to Invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to invention C4,
In the specific effect, in addition to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, a third specific effect (odd number high setting that suggests that the setting value is an odd setting value with a high probability among the setting values. Suggestive effect), and a fourth specific effect (even number high setting suggestive effect) that suggests that the probability is an even set value with a high probability among the set values,
The effect control means,
Based on the last two digits of the variable display of the identification information being the same odd number, it is possible to execute the first specific effect.
The second specific effect can be executed based on that the last two digits of the number of times the variable display of the identification information is executed are the same even number.
The third specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the lower three digits of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the identification information are the same odd number,
It is characterized in that the fourth specific effect can be executed on the basis that the lower three digits of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the identification information are the same even number.

8-3-6. Invention C6
A gaming machine according to Invention C6,
A gaming machine according to any one of invention C1 to invention C5,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-3-7. Invention C7
A gaming machine according to Invention C7,
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (a special starting point 1 with the number of holdings <4, a winning to the first starting opening 11 and a special starting point 2 with the number of holdings <4, a winning to the second starting opening 12) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state that is advantageous to (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) that performs variable display of identification information (special view) for notifying the determination result on the display unit (special view display 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. A game control microcomputer 101),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
It is characterized in that the effect control means can execute a specific effect (setting value effect) relating to the setting value based on the number of times that the advantageous game state is entered.

8-3-8. Invention C8
A gaming machine according to Invention C8,
A gaming machine according to Invention C7,
The advantageous game state is a state in which a special game (big hit game) capable of obtaining a predetermined game privilege is being executed,
The determination means determines whether or not to execute the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
With the end of the special game, a game state control means (S1504, S1506) capable of setting a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It further comprises a control microcomputer 101),
The game state control means sets the specific game state to the normal game state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied,
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect based on the number of times the special game is executed after the special game is executed and the ending condition is not satisfied.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The game machine according to Invention D1
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (the special starting point 1 holds the winning number in the starting port 11 when the number of holdings <4, the special starting point 2 wins in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings <4) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means,
In the display unit (display unit 50a), a plurality of effect symbols (effect symbols G10) are variably displayed on the basis of the determination result by the determining unit, and then can be stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying the determination result. Yes,
It is characterized in that a specific effect (setting value effect) that suggests the setting value can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The game machine according to Invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention D1,
When the determination means determines that the advantageous game state is not set, the effect control means can execute the specific effect by the plurality of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying that the advantageous game state is not set. Is characterized in that

8-4-3. Invention D3
The game machine according to Invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention D2,
The effect control means,
When the variable display of the plurality of effect symbols is being performed, it is possible to put the plurality of effect symbols in a reach state,
When the variation display of the plurality of effect symbols that the reach state is not executed is performed, the specific effect can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols stopped and displayed in a mode of notifying that the advantageous gaming state is not performed. It is characterized by being.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The game machine according to Invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of invention D1 to invention D3,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to Invention E1 is
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (the special starting point 1 holds the winning number in the starting port 11 when the number of holdings <4, the special starting point 2 wins in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings <4) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The setting value includes a first setting value (setting value 1 to setting value 4), a second setting value (setting value 5 to setting value 6) having a higher probability than the first setting value, There is
There are first effect contents (victory or success) and second effect contents (defeat or failure) as the effect contents of the predetermined effect that the effect control means can execute.
When the first set value is set, after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control unit, a specific event (big hit game state, which is more advantageous to the player than that time) While a round game continues, a high-probability state, a high-probability state, etc.) may occur, the specific event occurs after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed by the effect control means. Never do
When the second set value is set, the specific event may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is performed by the effect control unit, and the effect control unit causes the specific event to occur. It is characterized in that the specific phenomenon may occur even after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The game machine according to Invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to Invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing a special game (big hit game) that can obtain a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous game state. Further provided with a game control microcomputer 101),
The specific event is execution of the special game.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to Invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing a special game (big hit game) that can obtain a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous game state. Further provided with a game control microcomputer 101),
In the special game, a plurality of unit games (round games) are executed,
The special game includes when the unit game is executed a first number of times and when the unit game is executed a second number of times after the first number of times,
The specific event is characterized in that the unit game is further executed the second number of times after the unit game is the first number of times.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The game machine according to Invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to Invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing a special game (big hit game) that can obtain a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101),
With the end of the special game, a specific game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1506) for setting a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, Further equipped with,
The specific event is a setting of the specific game state.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The game machine according to Invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to Invention E1,
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous game state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing a special game (big hit game) that can obtain a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101),
With the end of the special game, a specific game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1506) for setting a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, Further equipped with,
The specific game state has a time when it can be continued for a first period, and a time when it can be further continued for a second period after continuing the first period,
The specific event is characterized in that the specific game state can be further continued for the second period after the first game period is continued for the first period.

8-5-6. Invention E6
The game machine according to Invention E6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions E1 to E5,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1 is
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (the special starting point 1 holds the winning number in the starting port 11 when the number of holdings <4, the special starting point 2 wins in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings <4) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) that performs variable display of identification information (special view) for notifying the determination result on the display unit (special view display 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. A game control microcomputer 101),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means suggests the set value based on a specific number of times (addiction number) that is the number of times the variable display of the identification information is continuously executed without the determination means determining that the advantageous game state is set. It is characterized in that production (set value production) can be executed.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2,
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
The specific effects include a first specific effect and a second specific effect,
The effect control means is capable of executing the first specific effect when the specific number of times reaches the first number of times, and the specific number of times reaches a second number that is larger than the first number of times. It is possible to execute the second specific effect,
The second specific effect is easier to recognize the set value than the first specific effect.

8-6-3. Invention F3
A gaming machine according to the invention F3,
A gaming machine according to invention F1 or invention F2,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to the invention G1 is
A predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is achieved by the establishment of a predetermined condition (a special starting point 1 with a holding number <4, a winning in the first starting opening 11 and a special drawing 2 holding number <4 with a winning in a second starting opening 12). ) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring ),
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, special game control means for executing the special game,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to execute the special game is different,
In the special game, a plurality of unit games (round games) are executed,
The special game includes a plurality of types of special games (fifth jackpot game to ninth jackpot game) depending on the number of unit games to be executed,
The effect control means,
At least, when any of the plurality of setting values including the maximum setting value (setting value 6) that is the setting value with the highest probability among the setting values is set, the number of times of the unit game is maximum. In the maximum special game that is the special game of, the maximum special game suggesting effect (blessing effect) that suggests that the maximum special game is being executed may be executed.
When the maximum setting value is set, the maximum special game suggesting effect may suggest that the maximum setting value is set.

8-7-2. Invention G2
A gaming machine according to the invention G2,
A gaming machine according to Invention G1,
In the maximum special game suggestion effect, the first maximum special game suggestion effect (maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect) that suggests that the maximum setting value is set, and the maximum setting value is set. There is a second maximum special game suggestion production (normal blessing production) that does not suggest,
The effect control means,
When the maximum set value is set, it is possible to execute the first maximum special game suggestion effect or the second maximum special game suggestion effect,
When a setting value other than the maximum value setting value is set, the second maximum special game suggestion effect can be executed.

8-7-3. Invention G3
A gaming machine according to the invention G3,
A gaming machine according to invention G1 or invention G2,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-8-1. Invention H1
The gaming machine according to the invention H1 is
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (the special starting point 1 holds the winning number in the starting port 11 when the number of holdings <4, the special starting point 2 wins in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings <4) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means,
On the display unit, based on the determination result by the determination means, after the effect symbol (effect symbol G10) is variably displayed, it is possible to stop and display in a manner of notifying the determination result,
It is possible to start the variable display of the effect design based on the set value.

8-8-2. Invention H2
A gaming machine according to the invention H2,
A gaming machine according to Invention H1,
The effect control means can start the variable display of the effect symbol based on the set value with respect to the variable display of the effect symbol that is first performed after the power of the game machine is turned on. Is characterized in that

8-8-3. Invention H3
A gaming machine according to the invention H3,
A gaming machine according to invention H1 or invention H2,
The effect control means, when the setting value of the day and the setting value of the previous day are the same, a display mode (normal start mode) when the effect design starts variable display, and the setting value of the day The display mode (first special start mode, second special start mode) when the effect design starts the variable display when the setting value of the previous day is different, may be different.

8-8-4. Invention H4
A gaming machine according to the invention H4,
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions H1 to H3,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-9-1. Invention I1
The game machine according to Invention I1 is
A predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is achieved by the establishment of a predetermined condition (a special starting point 1 with a holding number <4, a winning in the first starting opening 11 and a special drawing 2 holding number <4 with a winning in a second starting opening 12). ) Determining means (S1602, S1609 game control microcomputer 101) for determining whether to execute the first special game (big hit game) or the second special game (small hit game).
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the first special game, a first special game control means (game control microcomputer 101 that executes S1505) that executes the first special game,
When it is determined by the determination means that the second special game is to be executed, second special game control means (the game control microcomputer 101 which executes S1507) which executes the second special game,
A game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 that executes S1506) capable of newly setting a game state (such as a high probability state) upon completion of the first special game,
And a set value setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one set value among a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6),
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
The probability that the determination means determines to execute the first special game varies depending on the set value.

8-9-2. Invention I2
The game machine according to Invention I2 is
A gaming machine according to invention I1,
The probability that it is determined that neither the first special game nor the second special game is executed is different depending on the set value.

8-9-3. Invention I3
The game machine according to Invention I3 is
A gaming machine according to invention I2,
The probabilities that the determination means determines to execute the second special game are substantially the same regardless of the set value.

8-9-4. Invention I4
The game machine according to Invention I4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions I1 to I3,
The predetermined conditions are the first condition (special figure 1 winning number to the first starting opening 11 when the number of holdings <4) and the second condition (special drawing 2 winning number to the second starting opening 12 when the number of holdings <4. ) And
The determination means determines whether or not to execute the first special game or the second special game when the first condition is satisfied. First determination means (game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602). There is a second determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1609) that determines whether to execute the first special game or the second special game when the second condition is satisfied. ,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the first determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the second determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same,
The probability that the first determination means determines to execute the second special game and the probability that the second determination means determines to execute the second special game are different.

8-9-5. Invention I5
The game machine according to Invention I5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions I1 to I4,
Further comprising operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-10-1. Invention J1
The game machine according to invention J1 is
Due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (the special starting point 1 holds the winning number in the starting port 11 when the number of holdings <4, the special starting point 2 wins in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings <4) Determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.),
Setting means for setting one set value out of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6),
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The setting means may set the set value by determining which of the set values to set.

8-10-2. Invention J2
The game machine according to invention J2 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
Further provided is a switching operation means (setting value setting method changeover switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options,
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (for example, random settings A and D) and a second specific option (for example, random settings B and C),
When the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination, when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected. It is characterized in that the determination probabilities are different.

8-10-3. Invention J3
The game machine according to Invention J3 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
A first switching operation means (setting value setting method changeover switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options;
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation of switching the setting value;
The plurality of options include at least a specific option (random setting A to random setting D) and a non-specific option (random setting OFF),
The setting means,
When the specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value based on an operation on the second switching operation means.

8-10-4. Invention J4
The game machine according to invention J4 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
A first switching operation means (setting value setting method changeover switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options;
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation of switching the setting value;
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (random setting A, random setting D), a second specific option (random setting B, random setting C), and a non-specific option (random setting OFF). ,
The setting means,
When the first specific option or the second specific option is selected, the setting value can be set by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value based on an operation on the second switching operation means,
When the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination, when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected. It is characterized in that the determination probabilities are different.

8-11-1. Invention K1
The gaming machine according to the invention K1 is
A start winning area (first start opening 11, second start opening 12) provided in a game area (game area 6) in which the game balls can flow down, and in which the game balls can enter
When the game ball enters the start winning area, a determination means (a game control microcomputer 101 that executes S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to execute a special game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) for setting one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6),
And a production control means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
The effect control means, the payout number (specific acquisition number) of the game balls paid out during the special game, and the game discharged to the outside of the game area after the special game is performed. It is characterized in that a specific effect (setting value effect) suggesting the setting value set by the setting value means may be executed based on the number of discharged balls (specific out number).

8-11-2. Invention K2
The gaming machine according to the invention K2,
A gaming machine according to invention K1,
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect on condition that the discharged number reaches the payout number.

8-11-3. Invention K3
The gaming machine according to the invention K3,
A gaming machine according to invention K1 or invention K2,
The special game includes a first special game (big hit game) and a second special game (small hit game),
After the first special game is completed, it is possible to set an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability high base game state, high probability low base game state, low probability high base game state) Further provided with a game state setting means,
The payout number is the number of game balls paid out when the first special game and the second special game are being performed.

8-11-4. Invention K4
The game machine according to the invention K4 is
A gaming machine according to invention K3,
Further comprising a normal game state setting means capable of setting the normal game state,
As for the payout number, the first special game and the second special game are performed in a specific period from the execution of the special game to the setting of the normal game state by the normal game state setting means. It is the number of game balls paid out when
The payout number is a number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area after the specific period.

8-12-1. Invention L1
The gaming machine according to the invention L1 is
Judgment means (game control microcomputer 101 for executing S1602 and S1609) for judging whether or not a specific result (big hit) is obtained,
When the specific result is obtained, a game state control means (S1504 to S1506, etc.) capable of changing to an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. With a game control microcomputer 101)
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting a set value (set value 1, set value 2, set value 5, set value 6, etc.) for the determination means to make the determination ,
And a production execution means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
The gaming state control means is capable of ending the advantageous gaming state and setting the normal gaming state when the advantageous gaming state is set,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific information suggesting effect (second set value suggestion) that suggests specific information (high set value) regarding the set value when the normal game state is set. And

8-12-2. Invention L2
A gaming machine according to the invention L2,
A gaming machine according to Invention L1,
When the normal game state is set, the effect execution means can execute a special effect (display result) according to the normal game state being set, and when the special effect is being executed. It is characterized in that the specific information suggesting effect can be executed.

8-12-3. Invention L3
A gaming machine according to the invention L3,
A gaming machine according to invention L1 or invention L2,
Before executing the specific information suggesting effect (opening of the jackpot game), the effect executing means suggests non-specific information suggesting non-specific information (even number or odd number) different from the specific information with respect to the setting value ( Even number suggestion first set value effect or odd number suggestion first set value effect) can be executed.

8-13-1. Invention M1
The gaming machine according to the invention M1 is
Judgment means (game control microcomputer 101 for executing S1602 and S1609) for judging whether or not a specific result (big hit) is obtained,
When the specific result is obtained, a game state control means (S1504 to S1506, etc.) capable of changing to an advantageous game state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. With a game control microcomputer 101)
Setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting a set value (set value 1, set value 2, set value 5, set value 6, etc.) for the determination means to make the determination ,
And a production execution means (production control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined production,
In the predetermined effect, there is a specific effect (reach effect, etc.) that suggests that the advantageous gaming state may occur.
In the specific effect, a first specific effect L reach that indicates that the possibility of being in the advantageous game state is relatively low, and a possibility that the advantageous game state is relatively high. There are 2 specific effects (SP reach),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a set value effect that suggests information about the set value while executing the first specific effect.

8-13-2. Invention M2
The gaming machine according to the invention M2,
A gaming machine according to the invention M1,
It is characterized in that the effect execution means does not execute the setting value effect while executing the second specific effect.

8-13-3. Invention M3
A gaming machine according to the invention M3,
A gaming machine according to invention M1 or invention M2,
A plurality of types (L reach A to L reach E) are provided in the first specific effect,
The setting value effect suggests a first setting value effect (high setting value effect) indicating the first information (high setting value) related to the setting value and a second information (low setting value) indicating the setting value. There is a second set value effect (low set value effect),
A plurality of types (high set value suggestive image G55a for L reach A to high set value suggestive image G55e for L reach A) corresponding to the type of the first specific effect are used as the effect mode of the first set value effect. Is provided,
The aspect of the second set value effect is characterized in that one type (low set value suggestion image G54) common to all types of the first specific effect is provided.

PY1... Pachinko gaming machine 1... Gaming board 11... First starting opening 11a... First starting opening sensor 12... Second starting opening 12a... Second starting opening sensor 14... Big winning opening 14a... Big winning opening sensor 50... Image display Device 50a... Display unit 52... Speaker 53... Frame lamp 55... Board movable device 55k... Board movable body 70... Set value cylinder 70a... Set value cylinder sensor 71... Set value switch 71a... Set value switch sensor 74... Set value setting method Changeover switch 74a... Set value setting method changeover switch Sensor 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 140... Image control board

Claims (3)

Determination means for determining whether or not a specific result is obtained,
When the specific result is obtained, game state control means capable of changing to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
Setting means capable of setting a set value for the determination means to perform the determination,
And a performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The gaming state control means is capable of ending the advantageous gaming state and setting the normal gaming state when the advantageous gaming state is set,
The game machine characterized in that the effect executing means is capable of executing a specific information suggesting effect that suggests specific information regarding the set value when the normal game state is set. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect corresponding to the setting of the normal game state when the normal game state is set, and the specific information when executing the special effect. A game machine characterized by being able to execute suggestive productions. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a non-specific information suggesting effect that suggests non-specific information different from the specific information with respect to the set value before executing the specific information suggesting effect. .